You are on page 1of 200

KEYBOARD

SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600(ENGLISH)

SX-KN2400
SX-KN2600

KEYBOARD
Operating Instructions

SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read these
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/ instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.

QQTG0692
ENGLISH Se0203S0 ENGLISH QQTG0692

01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 2 ページ 2003年3月11日 火曜日 午後12時13分

Caution for AC Mains Lead
(For United Kingdom) WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE
(For the type as shown in figures A TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED
WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE EARTH
and B)
SYMBOL OR COLOURED GREEN OR
GREEN/ YELLOW.
For your safety, please read the following text
carefully.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF
—KEEP DRY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three
pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
Before use
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
Remove the connector cover.
fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and
How to replace the fuse
that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
The location of the fuse differ according to the type
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark of AC mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the
on the body of the fuse. AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions
below. Illustrations may differ from actual AC
mains plug.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you
must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. Figure A Figure B
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from
Fuse cover
your local dealer.

CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS
UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse
cover.
REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A Figure A Figure B
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK
IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO
Fuse
ANY 13-AMPERE SOCKET. Fuse
(5 ampere)
(5 ampere)

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the
wiring code as stated below. If in any doubt please
consult a qualified electrician. For United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland

IMPORTANT www.panasonic.co.uk (for UK customers only)
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor- • Order accessory and consumable items for your
product with ease and confidence by telephoning
dance with the following code: our Customer Care Centre Mon–Friday
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live. 9:00am–5:30pm. (Excluding public holidays.)
• Or go on line through our Internet Accessory
As these colours may not correspond with the col- ordering application.
oured markings identifying the terminals in your • Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
• All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities
plug, proceed as follows: are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
• It couldn’t be simpler!
The wire which is coloured Blue must be con-
nected to the terminal which is marked with the Customer Care Centre
For UK customers: 08705 357357 For Republic of
letter N or coloured Black or Blue. Ireland customers: 01 289 8333
The wire which is coloured Brown must be con- Technical Support
nected to the terminal which is marked with the For UK customers: 0870 1 505610
letter L or coloured Brown or Red. This Technical Support Hot Line number is for
Panasonic PC software related products only.
For Republic of Ireland, please use the Customer
Care Centre number listed above for all enquiries.
For all other product related enquiries, please
use the Customer Care Centre numbers listed
above.

2
QQTG0692

01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 3 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY THE FOLLOWING APPLIES
IN THE U.S.A. AND CANADA ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

CAUTION:
CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
DO NOT OPEN are designed to provide reasonable protection
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF against harmful interference in a residential instal-
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT lation. This equipment generates, uses and can
REMOVE SCREWS. radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS and used in accordance with the instructions, may
INSIDE. cause harmful interference to radio communica-
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED tions. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this
The lightning flash with arrowhead equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
symbol, within an equilateral tri- or television reception, which can be determined by
angle, is intended to alert the user turning the equipment off and on, the user is
to the presence of uninsulated encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
“dangerous voltage” within the pro- or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
duct’s enclosure that may be of
• Increase the separation between the equipment
sufficient magnitude to constitute a and receiver.
risk of electric shock to persons. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is con-
The exclamation point within an nected.
equilateral triangle is intended to • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
alert the user to the presence of technician for help.
important operating and main-
tenance (servicing) instructions in FCC Warning:
the literature accompanying the To assure continued FCC emission limit compli-
appliance. ance, use only the provided power supply cord and
(for U.S.A. and Canada) the shielded interface cable when connecting this
device to the computer.
CAUTION: Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE this equipment would void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY IN-
SERT. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
WARNING: ference, and (2) this device must accept any
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC interference received, including interference that
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE may cause undesired operation.
THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIP-
Responsible Party:
PING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS Matshshita Electric Corporation of America
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL One Panasonic Way
BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS. Secaucus, NJ, 07094 USA
Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

Notice: The model number and serial number are found
This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains a underneath the keyboard.
small amount of mercury. Please note the model and serial numbers in the
It also contains lead in some components. Disposal of space provided below and retain this sheet as a
these materials may be regulated in your community permanent record of your purchase to aid identification
due to environmental considerations. in the event of theft.
For disposal or recycling information please contact MODEL NUMBER
your local authorities, or the Electronics Industries
Alliance: <http://www.eiae.org> SERIAL NUMBER

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.
DENNA ENHET ÄR AVSEDD FÖR ANVÄNDNING PÅ PLATSER MED TROPISKT KLIMAT.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI TROOPPISESSA ILMASTOSSA.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER TROPISKE KLIMAFORHOLD.

3
QQTG0692

01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 4 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分

4
QQTG0692

during lightning storms. supply cord so that it will not be walked on or 2. Heat—Situate the unit away from heat sources. use. mechanical vibration. instructions. disconnecting it. Wall and ceiling mounting—Do not mount the unit This safety feature ensures that the plug fits into on walls or ceilings unless specified in the your household AC outlet only one way. 5. If the plug instructions. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the safety precautions listed below. Surface—Place the unit on a flat. hold of the plug or cord with wet hands. try reversing it. or Placement (b) Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit. not get into the unit. Magnetism—Situate the unit away from equipment characteristics as the original parts.A. Always Do not situate where temperatures fall below 5°C grasp the plug body firmly when connecting and (41°F) or rise above 35°C (95°F). pinched by items placed on or against it. this unit. servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition. substitutes may result in fire. 3.fm 5 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分 THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U. contact an electrician to replace the Environment obsolete outlet. or such as a bookcase or cabinet. Unplug the unit solvents. 7. Foreign material—Ensure objects and liquids do servicing personnel. such as near a bathtub or swimming pool. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. or it is not to be used for a long time. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference. ask the 5. uneven surfaces can cause carts to 2. Allow at least 10 cm (e) The unit has been dropped or the cabinet dam- (4 inches) clearance from the rear of the unit.01_Caution for AC Mains Lead. manufacturer or parts that have the same 3. cleaning. Power Cord protection—Route the AC power Avoid damp basements.) household AC outlet. 6. doesn’t fit one way. and as marked on the unit. or 1. Overloading—When connecting the AC power Maintenance supply cord. be careful not to overload the (See page 6 for details. 4. power plug where one blade is wider than the other. Nonuse periods—Turn the unit off when it is not in Clean with a damp cloth. Power Source—Connect the unit to a power the manufacturer. Water and moisture—Do not use the unit near purpose of the plug. Do not attempt to defeat the safety 1. scouring powders. Carts and stands—Use the unit only with carts and stands recommended by 1. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the unit heating ensure curtains and other materials do not beyond that described in these operating obstruct the unit’s ventilation. Safety 6. Ventilation—Situate the unit so that it receives (d) The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a proper ventilation. 2. Refer all other servicing to authorized 2. water. If the plug still doesn’t fit. electric shock. Replacement parts—When parts need replacing excessive smoke. Polarization—The unit is equipped with a polarized overturn. dust. 1. 5 QQTG0692 . Safety check—After repairs or service. 4. Move carts with care.S. level surface. extension cord. To aged. Unauthorized and devices that generate strong magnetic fields. or other 4. source of the type described in these instructions or Sudden stops. Damage Requiring Service—The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if: (a) The AC power supply cord or the plug has been Installation damaged. and ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the shock. prevent the risk of electric shock or fire due to over. Attachments and accessories—Use only the Service attachments and accessories recommended in these operating instructions. Never take such as radiators. or (c) The unit has been exposed to rain. or outlet from any other device as this can result in fire or electric Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet before shock. excessive force. Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet if Do not use abrasive pads. Avoid exposing the unit to 3. Do not install in a confined space marked change in performance. Stacking—Do not place heavy objects on top of hazards.

minimized. dry cloth. with wet unit. Be sure the line voltage selector is in accordance bronken. Never attempt to do these Be especially careful with regard to this point if things yourself. please increase separa. it may cause a fire or with local voltage in your area before connecting serious electrical shock if used. They should be warned never to try to put anything inside. NEVER use a dam- the plug to the socket. • A wax-based polish may be used on the cabinet. it is normal for the cabinet to become warm. orsakade av mobiltelefoner. If such • Det kan inträffa att den här produkten under interference is apparent. A well-ventilated place. Immediately turn off the power. soft. Polish may be used but do not use chased. and contact the store where it was pur. some such article does get inside. Failure to do so 2. purchased. Disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical simply use a clean. it is suggested that flower vases although you will find that rubbing with a soft and other containers which hold liquids not be cloth will suffice. or has a bad contact. Don’t pull the power cord. result in electric shock or damage. if such becomes necessary. damp cloth. • Håll SD-minneskortet utom räckhåll för barn. and con- will not receive sufficient ventilation. or to touch inside parts by hand Metal items inside the unit may or with tools. Moreover. potential. Öka avståndet phone. is partially cut or 1. disconnect the Take care not to use this unit in a place where it power cord plug from the electrical outlet. användningen tar emot radiostörningar. and do not switch the unit on and off in quick succession. The following suggestions will assist you in keeping disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical the unit in top condition. as this places an undue load on the electronic components. inspect the inside. nevertheless. Handling the power cord Don’t touch the inside parts of this 1. and contact the store where the unit was • Be sure to switch the instrument off after use. or any similar materials. or its plug. children to prevent them from swallowing it. • Because the power source is located inside the 3. Some places inside this unit have high voltage 2. mellan produkten och mobiltelefonen om • Keep the SD Memory Card out of the reach of störningarna är uppenbara. • This product may receive radio interference SVENSK: caused by mobile telephones during use. Maintenance If. As a precaution. children are near this unit. tion between the product and the mobile tele. unexpected damage or accident. or to replace a fuse. the 2. A place where humidity.fm 6 ページ 2003年2月7日 金曜日 午前11時32分 Cautions for safest use of this unit Installation location If operation seems abnormal 1. polish with a outlet. DC power cannot be used. aged power cord for any appliance. If water gets into the unit • To keep the luster of the surface and buttons. outlet. power cord should never be forcibly bent. Contact someone who is qualified in order to Do not permit metal articles to get inside the unit. Never try to remove the top or back panels of this unit.01_Caution for AC Mains Lead. hands. thinners or petro-chemical-based polishes. vibration and dust are unit. Never touch the power cord. Place away from direct sunlight and excessive may result in additional damage or some other heat from heating equipment. Discontinue using the unit at once. för (KN2600) att förhindra att ett barn sväljer det. (KN2600) SERVICE MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY DEALER OR OTHER QUALIFIED PERSON 6 QQTG0692 . Power source A word about the power cord If the power cord is scarred. permit the ventilation holes to be covered by cur- tains. placed on the top of this unit. and not to tact the store where it was purchased.

.... 64 Part III Performance Pads .................................................................................................. 35 Overview of sounds and effects........ 68 Compile................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60 Music Style Arranger................... 67 Playing phrases ........ 6 Controls and functions (KN2400)............................................................................................................... 27 Load rhythm data from a Technics pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD) (KN2400)........... 19 Select the registration for a music style (MUSIC STYLIST) . 76 Easy Record .. 29 PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS About the display ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Add effects ........... 46 Techni-chord ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35 Selecting sounds......................................................................................... 30 Favorites ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 33 Part I Sounds and effects .............................................................................................................................................................................. 37 Assigning parts to the keyboard............ 62 Panel Memory................... 41 Controller ... 60 Music Stylist ........... 14 See and listen to the demonstration ................................ 22 Store your panel settings (PANEL MEMORY)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 47 Part II Playing the rhythm ............................................................................................................................................... 70 Record a phrase ......................................................................................................................................................... 25 Save data on an SD card (KN2600) ........... 73 Sequencer parts............ 48 Selecting rhythms ..................................................................................fm 7 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分 Contents Cautions for safest use of this unit................................. 57 Sound Arranger............................ 77 Realtime Record .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 67 Copying phrases ............................................................................................................................. 24 Record your performance (SEQUENCER) .................................................................................................................... 73 Outline of the Sequencer ............. 36 Digital Drawbar ....................................... 39 Effects ............................................................................... 49 Playing the rhythm ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12 BASIC FUNCTIONS Getting started ................................................... 17 Play back commercial song disks (DIRECT PLAY) (KN2400)............ 71 Part IV Sequencer ..................................................... 78 7 QQTG0692 ........................... 20 Automatic panel settings (ONE TOUCH PLAY)................................................................................................................................................................ 59 One Touch Play ..................................................................................................................................02_Contents.............................. 51 Auto Play Chord........ 45 Transpose .................. 10 Controls and functions (KN2600)....................................................................................................... 48 Overview of rhythm performance................................................................................................................................................ 52 Fade In/Fade Out........... 18 Play back SD cards (SD-AUDIO PLAY) (KN2600) .......................................

..................................................................................... 97 Changing the note position etc....................................................................................................................................................... 94 Drum Edit .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104 Outline of the Composer ................................. 150 Master Tuning .................................................................................................................................. 140 Create an album of your favorite songs ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 137 Playlist........................................................................................................................ 104 Simple recording method ........................................................................... 136 SD-Sound Play ............................................................................................... 92 Song Clear ................... 122 Song Medley ........................................................................................................................ 106 Chord Modify Change ..................................................................................................................................................... 95 Copy and paste the recorded data............................. 152 Sound Load Option ........................................................................................................................................................................ 144 Set the priority of displays.................................................................................................................................. 154 Part IX Reverb & Effect .......................................................................02_Contents.............................................................. 120 Direct Play........................................................................................................................................................ 124 Saving data ........................................................................................................................................................................................fm 8 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分 Sequencer Play.......................................................................................... 111 Step Record ...................................................... 152 Key Scaling ..................................... 147 Mixer ................................................................................................................................................................. 117 Outline of the procedure ................................................ 81 Naming............................................................ 146 Outline of the Sound ........................................................................................................ 155 Outline of the Reverb & Effect ............... 83 Panel Write ................................... 109 Part Setting ................ 101 SD Audio Synchro (KN2600) ..................................................... 131 Outline of the SD card.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 130 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) .............................. 138 SD Song Medley ................................................ 131 Loading data ...................... 155 8 QQTG0692 ................................. 146 Part Setting ................ of the recorded data ........................................................... 145 Part VIII Sound .............................................................. 93 Note Edit ............................................................. 84 Punch Record ............................................................................................................................................... 119 Loading data .......... 153 APC Reverb Setting................................................................ 125 Disk management ........................................................................... 139 Saving Data ............................................................................... 111 Measure Edit................................................................................................................................................... 83 Song Select........................... 115 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) .......................................... 110 Playback .............................. 91 Quantize............................................................................... 133 SD-Audio Play..................... 128 Set the automatic display when a disk is inserted ......................................................................................... 84 Step Record .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 86 Track Assign .............................................. 93 Track Clear ....................................................................... 103 Part V Composer .............................................................. 106 Create a completely new rhythm .............................................................................................................. 112 Pattern Copy ..................................................................................................................... 117 Outline of the Disk Drive function.................................................................................................. 143 SD card management .................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 177 What is MIDI? .................................. 177 Outline of MIDI functions. 195 䡲 Supplied accessories please check the supplied accessories.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 169 Store the new sound .................................................................... 172 Foot Controllers .......................................................... 183 Input/output Setting............................ 163 Amplitude Edit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 168 Controller Edit ................................................ 188 Symptoms which appear to be signs of trouble............................................................... 187 Separately sold options ........................................................ 182 Mode Setting............................................... 176 Part XII MIDI .................................................................. 156 Part X Sound Edit ............ 189 Error messages............................................................................................... 183 MIDI Presets ....................fm 9 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分 Tone Control ................................ 176 MIDI Setting Load Option.......... 167 Effect Edit................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 159 Pitch Edit.................................................. 193 Specifications ................................................................ 157 Outline of the Sound Edit................................................................. 181 Realtime Messages .............................................................. 191 Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 172 Part XII Customize .......................... 175 Data Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 169 Part XI Control .............................................................................................................................................. 181 Common Setting ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 171 Outline of Control functions.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 174 Display Time Out .. 165 LFO Edit ..... 171 Overall Touch Sensitivity ................................................................................... 185 Initialize....................... 158 Tone Edit..... 157 Easy Edit....... 184 Computer Connection ........02_Contents.................................... 162 Filter Edit................................... 186 About the performance data.......................................................................................... □ Music stand □ CD-ROM □ AC cord □ SD Card (KN2600) 9 QQTG0692 .......................................................................................... 187 Terminals.................... 174 Outline of Customize functions ......................... 179 Part Setting .......................................................................................... 180 Control Messages ......................................................................

03_Controls and functions.fm 10 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分 Controls and functions (KN2400) AUTO PLAY CHORD RHYTHM GROUP Add an automatic accompaniment Various rhythm patterns are to your selected rhythm.) 10 QQTG0692 .) (Refer to page 57.) MUSIC STYLIST You can choose to have all the settings of this instrument automatically set. (Refer to page 45. (Refer to page 60. (Refer to page 67. available for each rhythm group.) FADE IN/OUT PITCH BEND Begin your song with a slowly The PITCH BEND wheel allows increasing volume. (Refer to page 52. having the sound slowly fade away.) (Refer to page 49.) DOWN ONE TOUCH PLAY Sounds and effects matching the selected rhythm are automatically set. (Refer to page 60. or end it by a “sliding” change in the pitch.) SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST OTHER PARTS/TR ONE TOUCH PLAY FAVORITES CONTRAST MUTE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP FADE MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 VARIATION FILL IN INTRO & ENDING 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT POWER 5 RESET INTRO OFF ON PITCH BEND PERFORMANCE PADS UP Add various phrases to your performance with the pad buttons.

) • Use the CONTRAST buttons to adjust the display so that it is easy to read. (Refer to page 36.) (Refer to page 73. then assign the desired them instantaneously just by pressing parts to section of the keyboard.) (Refer to page 39.) CONDUCTOR PANEL MEMORY Assign a different sound to each Store the panel settings. (Refer to page 41. sounds. then recall part. SOUND GROUP TRANSPOSE Various sounds are available for Raise or lower the key each sound group.fm 11 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分 DISPLAY EFFECT Displays performance information. 03_Controls and functions. a button or two.) 11 QQTG0692 .) (Refer to page 30.) EFFECT DIGITAL MULTI SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SAX & MALLET & BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC DRUM SOUND BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY DIGITAL DRAWBAR DISPLAY HOLD EXIT HELP PAGE TRANSPOSE PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM – + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS SYNCHRO & BANK VIEW START/STOP TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC DISK DISK IN USE NEXT BANK CONDUCTOR LOAD TECHNI-CHORD SEQUENCER Block chords are Record and play back your automatically added to the performance. melody. (Refer to page 64. function Add various effects to the settings and other messages. (Refer to page 47.) (Refer to page 46. of the entire keyboard.

The MODULATION wheel is used to add vibrato to the sound.) having the sound slowly fade away.) group.) PITCH BEND/MODULATION The PITCH BEND wheel allows a “sliding” change in the pitch.) 12 QQTG0692 . (Refer to page 57. (Refer to page 60. available for each rhythm (Refer to page 52.03_Controls and functions. (Refer to page 49.) SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST OTHER PARTS/TR ONE TOUCH PLAY FAVORITES CONTRAST MUTE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 VARIATION FILL IN INTRO & ENDING 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT POWER 5 RESET INTRO OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX PERFORMANCE PADS FADE IN/OUT Add various phrases to your Begin your song with a slowly DOWN MIN performance with the pad increasing volume.) MUSIC STYLIST You can choose to have all the settings of this instrument automatically set. (Refer to page 67.fm 12 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分 Controls and functions (KN2600) AUTO PLAY CHORD RHYTHM GROUP Add an automatic accompaniment Various rhythm patterns are to your selected rhythm. or end it by buttons. (Refer to page 45.

then assign the desired them instantaneously just by pressing parts to section of the keyboard.) (Refer to page 36.) CONDUCTOR PANEL MEMORY Assign a different sound to each Store the panel settings.) • Use the CONTRAST buttons to adjust the display so that it is easy to read. function Add various effects to the settings and other messages. a button or two. each sound group.) (Refer to page 39. (Refer to page 41.) 13 QQTG0692 . TRANSPOSE SOUND GROUP Raise or lower the key Various sounds are available for of the entire keyboard.) (Refer to page 30. then recall part. (Refer to page 64. melody. (Refer to page 46. sounds.) EFFECT DIGITAL MULTI SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SAX & MALLET & BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC DRUM SOUND BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY DIGITAL DRAWBAR DISPLAY HOLD EXIT HELP PAGE PUSH RELEASE TRANSPOSE PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM – + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS SYNCHRO & BANK VIEW START/STOP TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK CONDUCTOR LOAD TECHNI-CHORD SEQUENCER Block chords are Record and play back your automatically added to the performance.) (Refer to page 73. 03_Controls and functions. (Refer to page 47.fm 13 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分 DISPLAY EFFECT Displays performance information.

04_Basic functions. (Refer to page 152. and sound is heard only through the headphones. the functions and memories of this instrument may be initialized when the power is turned on. • The pitch of this instrument can be adjusted for when playing with other instruments. 3 Press the POWER button to turn it on. OFF ON • Headphones may be plugged into the PHONES terminal.fm 14 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Getting started Before you play AC IN 1 Plug the power cord into an outlet. 14 QQTG0692 .) • Under certain conditions. (Rear panel) This will automatically switch off the speaker system. (Located on the left of the keyboard) POWER 2 Affix the music stand as shown.

press either PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION PAGE button. 5 Set the MAIN VOLUME to an appropriate level with the sliding control. it on.fm 15 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Playing EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 5 4 3 12 1 In the CONDUCTOR section on the panel. • Your Keyboard features Touch Response.04_Basic functions. LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CONDUCTOR PAGE 2 In the SOUND GROUP section. • The list of sounds is contained on two or more screen “pages”. SAX & MALLET & BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC 4 Play the keyboard. You control the volume by DRUM SOUND BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY playing the keys harder or softer. 15 QQTG0692 . • Refer to page 36 for detailed information about selecting sounds. To see a SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & different part of the list. press the RIGHT 1 button to turn 3 Select a sound from the list of sounds shown on the display. press one of the sound buttons.

3 When you are finished listening to the demonstration tunes. button and then the START/STOP button. you wish to see and listen to. or if you press first the DEMO button or the DEMO button is pressed again. press the DEMO 2 Use the buttons to the left and right the display to select the demonstration tune button again.fm 16 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions See and listen to the demonstration EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 13 2 1 Press the DEMO button. The medley 16 QQTG0692 . DEMO • To end the demonstration before it has finished. medley performance. • The demonstration performance and display corresponding to your selection will begin. (KN2600) • If you press and hold the DEMO button for a performance continues until the START/STOP few seconds. press the START/STOP button. all • Some of the buttons do not function during the demo tunes are demonstrated in order in a DEMO mode. 04_Basic functions.

C Press the REVERB button to turn it on. A Press the CHORUS button to turn it on. B Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn it on. (Refer to page 42.04_Basic functions. Add reverberation.) 17 QQTG0692 . CHORUS REVERB Add effect. MULTI EFFECT • You can modify the way in which the various effects are applied.fm 17 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Add effects EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN ABC Add breadth.

2 On the DISK MENU display. • For SMF songs. 3 Use a the buttons below the display to select a song. 18 QQTG0692 . use the PLAY AS button to specify a sound arrangement mode. • DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following disks: Standard MIDI File Standard MIDI File with Lyrics DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION™ (DOC) PianoDisc™ * All product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. select DIRECT PLAY. * DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of the YAMAHA Corporation.fm 18 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Play back commercial song disks (DIRECT PLAY) (KN2400) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC DISK DISK IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND UP DOWN 234 1 Insert the song disk into the Disk Drive slot. • The selected song is played back. 4 Press the START button. 04_Basic functions.

04_Basic functions. 4 Press the SD button to turn it on. 5 On the SD MENU display. SD SD IN USE LOAD • Open it completely. • Push the card until it locks. • No operation is possible when the lid is open. • Playback of the first song begins. 3 Close the lid.fm 19 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Play back SD cards (SD-AUDIO PLAY) (KN2600) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 56123 4 1 Open the lid of the SD slot. 2 Insert an SD card with the stored songs into the SD slot. 19 QQTG0692 . select SD- AUDIO PLAY. 6 Press the Playback button.

fm 20 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Select the registration for a music style (MUSIC STYLIST) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 CHORD STEP REC NEXT BANK SD SD IN USE 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 1 23 Use the CATEGORY ▲ and ▼ buttons 1 Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it on. 3 to select a category. MUSIC STYLIST 2 Select MUSICAL CATEGORY. 04_Basic functions. 20 QQTG0692 .

04_Basic functions.fm 21 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分

Basic functions
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI
SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
POINT

CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET &
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY

LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
DISPLAY
ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP
PLAY < > MUTE PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE

DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE
RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM
IN OUT
MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS

PERFORMANCE PADS
1 2 3 BANK VIEW
VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI-
BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC
SD SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4 6
MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT
5 RESET INTRO
CONDUCTOR LOAD
POWER
OFF ON

PITCH BEND MODULATION

UP MAX

DOWN MIN

5 4
Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to
4 select a music style.

• You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨
buttons to skip to the previous or
following sub category.
• When you select a style, the sounds
and rhythm which are best suited for
the selected style are automatically
selected.

5 Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord, an intro is
played, after which the automatic
rhythm starts.

• You can also search for a style alphabetically
or by music era. (Refer to page 61.)

21
QQTG0692

04_Basic functions.fm 22 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Basic functions

Automatic panel settings
(ONE TOUCH PLAY)

EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI
SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
POINT

CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET &
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY

LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
DISPLAY
ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP
PLAY < > MUTE PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE

DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE
RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM
IN OUT
MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS

PERFORMANCE PADS
1 2 3 BANK VIEW
VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI-
BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC
SD SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4 6
MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT
5 RESET INTRO
CONDUCTOR LOAD
POWER
OFF ON

PITCH BEND MODULATION

UP MAX

DOWN MIN

34 6 1 25

1 In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press
the button for a desired rhythm. 4 Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s
MODE button to turn it on.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE OFF/ON

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & CHORD FINDER
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY

• Do not select the MEMORY button.
LOAD

5 Select BASIC on the display.

2 Select a rhythm from the list of rhythms
on the display.

6 Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY
button for a few seconds.

ONE TOUCH

3 Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s
OFF/ON button to turn it on..
PLAY

AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE OFF/ON
• The sound, effects and tempo suitable
CHORD FINDER for the selected rhythm are
automatically selected. The tempo can
be adjusted with the
TEMPO/PROGRAM.

22
QQTG0692

04_Basic functions.fm 23 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分

Basic functions
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI
SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
POINT

CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET &
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY

LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
DISPLAY
ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP
PLAY < > MUTE PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE

DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE
RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM
IN OUT
MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS

PERFORMANCE PADS
1 2 3 BANK VIEW
VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI-
BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC
SD SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4 6
MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT
5 RESET INTRO
CONDUCTOR LOAD
POWER
OFF ON

PITCH BEND MODULATION

UP MAX

DOWN MIN

7 8

C F G7 C

C F G7 C

7 Use your left hand to play the chords
and your right hand to play the melody. 8 At the end of your performance, press
the INTRO & ENDING 1 or 2 button.
• Pressing a key on the left area of the
keyboard will cause the automatic
rhythm pattern to start playing INTRO & ENDING
1 2
(synchro start).

• An ending pattern is played, after
which the automatic accompaniment
stops.
• If the START/STOP button is pressed,
the accompaniment stops
immediately.

C G7 F

• In this example you played chords by pressing • You can insert a fill-in pattern while the rhythm
the keys for the “root notes” (ONE FINGER pattern is playing by pressing either the FILL
chords). But you can also specify the chord by IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
playing all the notes in the chord. (Refer to
page 52.)

23
QQTG0692

04_Basic functions.fm 24 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Basic functions

Store your panel settings
(PANEL MEMORY)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI
SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
POINT

CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET &
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY

LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
DISPLAY
ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP
PLAY < > MUTE PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE

DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE
RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM
IN OUT
MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS

PERFORMANCE PADS
1 2 3 BANK VIEW
VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI-
BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC
SD SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4 6
MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT
5 RESET INTRO
CONDUCTOR LOAD
POWER
OFF ON

PITCH BEND MODULATION

UP MAX

DOWN MIN

23

1 Set up the desired panel settings
(sounds, volumes, etc.) 3 With the SET button held down, press
one of the numbered buttons of the
PANEL MEMORY (1 to 8).

2 Use the NEXT BANK button to select a
bank (A, B, C). PANEL MEMORY
1 2 3 4 SET

NEXT BANK BANK VIEW

5 6 7 8

NEXT BANK

• The bank numbers are shown on the
• The current panel settings are now
display.
stored in the specified bank and
number. When you select the same
Bank number
bank and number again, the stored
panel settings are recalled.

• If you do not wish to recall the rhythm, tempo,
etc. with the PANEL MEMORY, press and
hold the SET button for a few seconds to show
the PANEL MEMORY MODE display, and
select NORMAL.
24
QQTG0692

(Continued on the next page) 25 QQTG0692 . SEQUENCER PLAY EASY REC • The display changes to the REALTIME RECORD display.fm 25 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Record your performance (SEQUENCER) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK SD 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 2 1 Sonatina Sound: Piano (RIGHT 1 part) Right hand Left hand 1 In the SEQUENCER section.04_Basic functions. press the EASY REC button to turn it on. 2 Press the OK button.

START/STOP 1 2 3 4 BEAT • Your performance is played back just as you recorded it. 04_Basic functions. • When you are finished playing back your performance. IN 1) button.fm 26 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 3 A B 4 Playing back your recorded 3 Play the song on the keyboard. FILL IN 1 SEQUENCER PLAY EASY REC SEQUENCER RESET • The PLAY button in the SEQUENCER section turns on. 26 QQTG0692 . B Press the START/STOP button. press the PLAY button in the SEQUENCER section to turn it off. press the EASY REC button again to turn it off. performance A Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL 4 When you have finished playing.

fm 27 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Save data on an SD card (KN2600) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 3456 2 1 Insert an SD card you wish to save to into the SD slot. 27 QQTG0692 . (Refer to page 19) 4 Select TECHNICS FORMAT. • The performance data of the song recorded in the SEQUENCER is saved on the SD card. SD SD IN USE LOAD 3 On the SD MENU display. 6 Press the SAVE button. 5 Specify the FOLDER and a SONG number to save to. • Close the cover securely.04_Basic functions. select SAVE. 2 Press the SD button.

fm 28 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 23 5 1 4 Recall data from an SD card 1 Press and hold the SD button for a few seconds. ■ The following data can be saved/loaded: CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings) PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PERFORMANCE COMPOSER (MEMORY contents) SOUND MEMORY PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories) EFFECT MEMORY BACKUP MIDI (USER memories for the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES • KN2400: The data can be saved in the disk.) 28 QQTG0692 . • The data is copied to the internal memory of this instrument. 04_Basic functions. SEQUENCER PLAY EASY REC 2 Select the FOLDER and the SONG you wish to load. SD SD IN USE LOAD 4 Press the PLAY button in the SEQUENCER section to turn it on. 3 Press the LOAD button. (Refer to page 125. 5 Press the START/STOP button. START/STOP 1 2 3 4 BEAT • The recalled song is played back.

04_Basic functions.fm 29 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分 Basic functions Load rhythm data from a Technics pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD) (KN2400) EFFECT SOUND ARRANGER AUTO PLAY CHORD DIGITAL MULTI SET OFF/ON SPLIT MODE OFF/ON SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB POINT CHORD FINDER RHYTHM GROUP SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & SAX & MALLET & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH ORCH PERC JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & DRUM SOUND SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY LOAD MUSIC STYLIST DIGITAL DRAWBAR OTHER PARTS/TR DISPLAY ONE TOUCH LCD CONTRAST HOLD EXIT HELP PLAY < > MUTE PAGE PUSH RELEASE DEMO MAIN VOLUME AUTO SETTING BANK STOP/ FADE TRANSPOSE RECORD MUSIC STYLE TEMPO/ PROGRAM PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PROGRAM IN OUT MAX ARRANGER Ð + PART SELECT 1 2 3 4 SET PLAY EASY REC MENUS PERFORMANCE PADS 1 2 3 BANK VIEW VARIATION & MSA FILL IN INTRO & ENDING START/STOP SYNCHRO & TECHNI- BREAK LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 CHORD CHORD STEP 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 BEAT TAP TEMPO 5 6 7 8 REC SD SD IN USE NEXT BANK 4 6 MIN SOLO SEQUENCER COUNT 5 RESET INTRO CONDUCTOR LOAD POWER OFF ON PITCH BEND MODULATION UP MAX DOWN MIN 2 34 1 Insert a commercially sold Technics pattern disk into the Disk Drive slot. just like the preset rhythms. 2 In the RHYTHM GROUP section. 29 QQTG0692 . 4 Press the LOAD button. JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & You can use the rhythms during your SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY performance. RHYTHM GROUP POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ • Rhythm data is loaded to the COMPOSER memory (MEMORY). LOAD 3 Select the name of the pattern to load. press and hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few seconds.

• Affects the sound of all parts except the keys.” • Pressing either balance button for a muted part will cancel the mute function. the actual displays on your instrument may differ from the illustrations. 30 QQTG0692 . press both the corresponding play the auto accompaniment part setting upper and lower buttons at the same time. lower button to decrease it. easy to operate with excellent readability. back. is used for displaying various information such as the names of the selected sounds and rhythms etc. To mute a part. screen. • The volume display for a muted part is shown • DRM: DRUMS ACP: ACCOMP as “MUTE. 05_About the display. and when setting the functions. Let’s take a look. press the 䡲 MUSIC upper button to increase the volume and the “MUSIC” pertains to the SEQUENCER’s volume. About the display Normal display (HOME PAGE) This is the kind of information you see on the dis- play during a normal performance. Selected rhythm RIGHT 1 part sound Tempo RIGHT 2 part sound LEFT part sound Volume of each part Volume balance At the bottom half of the normal display. OTHER PARTS/TR MUTE APC: AUTO PLAY CHORD PADS: PERFORMANCE PADS METR: METRONOME When setting the volume balance. • The display illustrations shown in this User’s Manual are examples for the sake of clarification. <Auto accompaniment part> 䡲 MUTE Pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button will dis.fm 30 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分 About the display A large-size display. the vol- ume balance of each part is represented in a fader illustration and by a number (0 to 127). • Hold a button down to scroll the volume • KN2600: does not affect SD-AUDIO data play- quickly. You can use the balance buttons below the display to adjust the volumes.

05_About the display.fm 31 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分

䡲 OTHER PARTS/TR (PT) is used to playback recording and song
By the pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button, data.
the screen sequentially switches to the respec-
tive volume balance screens of the play part, • When there are other parts or tracks to
auto accompaniment part, playback part (1 to 8), access, the OTHER PARTS/TR indicator is lit.
and playback part (9 to 16). The playback part

PAGE Menu display

About the dispoay
When there are additional parts to the current The PROGRAM MENUS button controls multiple
display, a page number indication, for example functions. Press the button to access its menu
PAGE1/2, appears in the upper right corner of display.
the screen. For example, 1/2 indicates that there
are two pages of the display, and the current PROGRAM
page is page 1. In this case, you can use the MENUS

upper and lower PAGE buttons, to the right of
the balance buttons, to view different “pages” of
the display.
䡲 Example of menu display: PROGRAM
MENUS
Select a function from the menu display by
pressing the corresponding button to the left or
PAGE
right of the display indicated by the 䊴 and 䊳
arrows.

• Press the upper button to view the next page
of the display, and the lower button to view the
previous page of the display.
• On the last page of the display, pressing the
upper button returns to the first page. And
conversely, on the first page of the display,
pressing the lower button will skip to the last
page.
• In this manual, the steps describing how to
select a function from a menu display are gen-
erally abbreviated as follows, for example: “On
the PROGRAM MENUS display, select
SOUND.”

31
QQTG0692

05_About the display.fm 32 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分

Setting display EXIT
When you select an item from the menu display, While the setting display is shown, press this but-
the setting display for the item is shown. ton to go back to the previous display.
The buttons to the right, left and/or directly below
the display are used to select and adjust the set-
tings. DISPLAY
HOLD EXIT HELP

䡲 Example of setting display: MASTER
About the display

TUNING

DISPLAY HOLD
Press this button to turn it on when you wish to
maintain the current display. You can keep a dis-
play which is normally automatically canceled,
for example, or even during a performance, you
can monitor information which is not shown on
the normal display.

Press the button corresponding to the ∧ or ∨ but- DISPLAY
HOLD EXIT HELP
ton on the display to change the value.
• In this manual, this procedure is written as fol-
lows: “Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
pitch.”

• The indicator for this button may flash if the
TEMPO/PROGRAM current display is one which is normally auto-
If the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit while matically canceled.
you are using the display to adjust the setting, it • If the PROGRAM MENUS button, for exam-
indicates that these buttons can be used to ple, is pressed, the DISPLAY HOLD mode is
quickly change the displayed value or setting. canceled.

TEMPO/ PROGRAM

CONTRAST
Press the CONTRAST button and adjust the dis-
play's viewability using the ∧ and ∨ buttons on
the screen.

CONTRAST
• The setting which can be adjusted is high-
lighted on the display.

• When adjusting the CONTRAST, the set value
is shown shortly on the display.

32
QQTG0692

05_About the display.fm 33 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分

HELP • An explanation of the button’s function is
shown on the display.
You can find an explanation of each button’s
function on the display.
5. Press the HELP button again to exit the help
mode.
1. Press the HELP button.
• Attention display messages and error mes-
DISPLAY sages are also shown in the selected lan-
HOLD EXIT HELP
guage.

About the dispoay
• The appearance of the display on your instru-
ment may be different from the illustrated dis-
play in this manual depending on the region in
which your instrument was purchased and the
• The following display appears. selected display language.

2. Use the buttons below the display to select a
language.

3. Press the OK button.
4. Press a button on the panel whose explana-
tion you wish to read.

Favorites
With up to 9 types of sounds, rhythms, functions, etc., you can arrange them to make up your own unique
screen pattern.

1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on. • The display looks similar to the following.

FAVORITES

• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select the desired item.
• Use the CATEGORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-
ify a category, and then the ITEM ∧ and ∨ but-
tons to select an item.
• The MUTE KEYS function silences the sound
of the keyboard keys. This is convenient when
you wish to pretend to play the keyboard while
playing back a recorded performance.
2. Press the FAVORITES SETTING button.
• The PANIC function interrupts the sound, for
example, when it fails to cease during a MIDI
performance.

(Continued on the next page)

33
QQTG0692

05_About the display.fm 34 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分

4. While pressing the SET button, specify where 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the display you
you wish to paste (put) the item. want.
• While the SET button is depressed, the dis- • There are nine settable items on the display.
play appears as shown below. Use the but-
tons to the left and right of the display to 6. On the FAVORITES SETTINGS display,
specify where you wish to paste the item. press the OK button.
• Your customized display is stored.
About the display

䡲 Recall a FAVORITES display
1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.

2. Use the buttons to the left and right of the dis-
play to specify the ITEM you wish to recall.

• The FAVORITES settings can be saved to a
disk/card.

34
QQTG0692

parts. Sounds and effects controls possible when data is created and • These are independent from the playback reproduced by computer. RIGHT 2. refer to page 16-part standard MIDI files (SMF). and dramatically expands the number of sounds RIGHT 1. DRUMS 1. BASS.fm 35 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Overview of sounds and effects The following is an overview of the sound parts of this instrument. ance quality and expressive power. and make various the keyboard. 118. This instrument is organized into the following erator format which evokes realtime perform. NX SOUND Part NX SOUND is the Technics original sound gen. PADS: Parts for the PERFORMANCE PADS 35 QQTG0692 . or parts for compatible with NX SOUND song data. LEFT: and effects generated. ACCOMP1 to 5. This format includes These are the parts the performer plays on GM2 (General MIDI Level 2). 2: Parts for the automatic accompaniment. PART1 to 16: • Equipment with the logo shown below is SMF song disk playback parts. parts. For example one can to perform on the keyboard while playing back a song disk with • For information about GM2.06_Part I. MIDI receive.

DIGITAL DRAWBAR 4. choose the desired sound from the display.fm 36 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Selecting sounds Select the sounds for the three parts you can play on the keyboard—RIGHT 1. changes depending on sounds that you play by striking the keyboard how hard the keyboard is played). and the actual display may be different.) • For the RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts.) 2. 06_Part I. the optimum effects vated. Select the desired sound from the list on the 1.) 36 QQTG0692 . In the SOUND GROUP section. BASS KITS EXPLORER MEMORY • The illustrated display shows one example. Sounds and effects PART SELECT LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 • The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to spec- ify which part is heard. select a • You can use the PAGE buttons to view a dif- sound group. choose RIGHT 3. You can also choose to cancel this automatic feature. RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts and for DRUM SOUND PART 1-16 vary. when a CONDUCTOR button is selected. display. for the sound are automatically applied. • When you select a sound. RIGHT 2 or LEFT. the corre- sponding PART SELECT button is also acti. Play the keyboard. • This instrument features INITIAL TOUCH (the • The sounds in DRUM KITS are percussion volume. for example. BRASS SYNTH ORCH PERC WOODWIND • The sounds that can be selected for the RIGHT 1. ferent page of the list. • MEMORY is reserved for storing sounds you modify. (Refer to page 153. In the PART SELECT section. (Refer to page 39. keys. RIGHT 2 and LEFT. Select a sound 1. SOUND GROUP STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN & • Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select PIANO VOCAL HARPSI ACCORDION the octave. • The sound you select is memorized for the SAX & MALLET & part you selected in step 1. After first selecting a part and a SOUND GROUP. (Refer to page 170.

GROUP of sound. GRAM CHANGE number. • The display looks similar to the following. select a part. SOUND ARRANGER or PER- DIGITAL DRAWBAR FORMANCE PADS. In the PART SELECT section. 2. Sounds and effects • Press the ALP button to return to the CATE- GORY display. corresponding balance buttons to adjust the volume. • The numerical value that is displayed for each 2.. select the sound. Press the SOUND EXPLORER button to turn sound is the MIDI [BANK MSB. • The volume of each drawbar is illustrated on the display and changes when you press the 37 QQTG0692 . • GM2 sounds are selected on this display. LSB]-PRO- it on. (Continued on the next page) 3. Use the GRP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a you want from the many available sounds. 1. Press the DIGITAL DRAWBAR button to turn • The DIGITAL DRAWBAR can not be selected it on. choose RIGHT 4. for the ACCOMP and BASS parts of the COMPOSER. In the PART SELECT section. <DRAWBAR SETTING> Press the DRAWBAR SETTING button. Use the balance buttons below the display to adjust the volume of each drawbar. SOUND EXPLORER 䡲 ALPHABET Press the CTG button to show the sound names in alphabetical order.fm 37 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects SOUND EXPLORER This is a convenient feature for finding the sound 3. Digital Drawbar You can play organ sounds while controlling the drawbars on the display. RIGHT 2 or LEFT. Use the buttons on both side of the display to 1.06_Part I. 1.

whichever is relevant for the selection. If 8’ is used as the standard (the pitch as played on the keyboard). select a setting item. 䡲 PERCUSSIVE TONE and set. and use one of the ∧ and ∨ buttons. The tremolo speed ATTACK TIME: Sounds and effects can be changed while you are playing. a 16’ rank pitch will be one octave below the 8’ rank pitch. RELEASE TIME: Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it • The tremolo setting is effective for each part in takes for the drawbar sound to die out after common. • The above settings are effective for the RIGHT 1. takes for the percussive tone to die out. LEVEL: Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol- ume of the percussive tone. PERCUSSIVE TONE adds a tone with a fast ini- tial attack to the drawbar sounds. SLOW and FAST rotating speeds. Use the PERCUSSIVE TONE 2 2/3’ and 4’ but- tons to turn the respective tone on or off. DECAY: • The TREMOLO is disabled if the MULTI Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it EFFECT button is turned ON. About foot marks The foot indication (for example 8’) refers to the pitch of a rank of pipes in a pipe organ. the sounds of the different pitch ranks are as follows. like the effect of a rotating speaker.fm 38 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects 䡲 Change the sound type 䡲 Other settings Use the <Jazz Drawbars> / <Rock Drawbars> Use the buttons on either side of the display to button to select the type of sound. c 2 d2 e2 f 2 g2 a2 b 2 c3 d3 e3 f3 g3 a3 b3 c 4 d4 e4 f 4 g4 a4 b 4 c 5 d5 e5 f 5 g5 a5 b 5 c6 16' 8' 5 1/3 ' 4' 2 2/3 ' 2' 1 3/5 ' 1 1/3 ' 1' 38 QQTG0692 . and a 4’ rank pitch one octave above. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it takes for the drawbar sound to sound after Use the TREMOLO button to switch between the a key is played. the keys are released. You can select two pitch levels of attack tones. 06_Part I. When the C3 key is pressed. 䡲 TREMOLO Tremolo is a rapid oscillation in volume. RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts in com- mon.

—PIANIST mode: The keyboard cannot be split. and assign a different sound to each section. CONDUCTOR LEFT RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2 The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 1 sound. LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 CONDUCTOR All keys produce both the RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.06_Part I. LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2 CONDUCTOR The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.fm 39 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Assigning parts to the keyboard The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to assign the parts (RIGHT 1. CONDUCTOR CONDUCTOR settings How sounds are assigned to the keyboard All keys produce the RIGHT 1 sound.) • The following conditions are in effect when the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used. you can split the keyboard into right and left sections (SPLIT). CONDUCTOR LEFT RIGHT 2 • The volume for each part can be adjusted independently. LEFT) to the keyboard in many different ways. (Refer to page 30. 39 QQTG0692 . ADVANCED mode: You cannot assign sounds to all the keys. RIGHT 2. Sounds and effects LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 1 CONDUCTOR All keys produce the RIGHT 2 sound. For example. CONDUCTOR LEFT RIGHT 1 The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 sound. —BASIC.

40 QQTG0692 . and is indicated on the keyboard illustration on the display. 2. the display exits the set- ting mode. C3 SPLIT POINT Sounds and effects 䡲 Customized split point Use the following procedure if you wish to store a split point at a location other than C3. • The key at the split point is the lowest note of the right keyboard section. the split point is usually C3. Press a key on the keyboard to specify the desired split point. Press the SPLIT POINT button. SPLIT POINT • The following display appears. • After a few seconds.fm 40 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects SPLIT POINT When the keyboard is split into left and right sec- tions. • A split point is set at the location of the pressed key. 1. 06_Part I.

DIGITAL EFFECT • The on or off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT is preset for each sound. DIGITAL EFFECT DIGITAL EFFECT gives the sound richness and enhances your performance. SUSTAIN • The SUSTAIN can be set to on or off for each part. the sustain can be turned on and off with the optional Foot Switch (sold separately). 41 QQTG0692 . • This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM KITS sound groups. Press the SUSTAIN button to turn it on. • This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM KITS sound group. • This effect may not work for some sounds. • This effect may not work for some sounds. 2.06_Part I. 1. 2. 1. turn on the part to which this effect will be Sounds and effects applied. • In the initialized state. Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button to turn it on. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec- tion. turn on the part to which this effect will be applied. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec- tion.fm 41 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Effects SUSTAIN SUSTAIN is the gradual fading out of musical tones after the key is released.

Use the EFFECT MEMORY ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify the location in which to store the • This display can also be accessed from the edited effect. • The display changes to the following. Select an effect type to use as a base. turn on the part to which this effect will be applied. Press and hold the MULTI EFFECT button for select the parameter.fm 42 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects MULTI EFFECT The MULTI EFFECT works like a studio effects 䡲 EFFECT EDIT processor. • The display changes to the following. Press the EFFECT NAMING button and assign a name to the effect. 7.” use the PAGE buttons to switch • Refer to page 65 for details about the pages. (Refer to page 155. The effects can be edited and then stored in a PHASER. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the setting. if necessary. • If the types comprise more than one display 6. 3. MULTI EFFECT Sounds and effects 䡲 Type and parameter settings 3.) 8. providing effects such as CHORUS. Press the OK button. Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to 1. Use the buttons to the right of the display to select the type. 1. 5. 1. • Press the VARI button to enable the variation effect. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect group. 2. NAMING procedure. a few seconds. 42 QQTG0692 . • (V) is the abbreviation of VARIATION. 2. Press the WRITE button. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec. Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn it on. 4. 2. REVERB & EFFECT MENU display. memory. 06_Part I. tion. DELAY and DISTORTION. • The parameters vary depending on the effect type selected as the base. Press the EDIT button. • The EFFECT MEMORY is for edited effects (see below). “page.

• This display can also be accessed from the REVERB & EFFECT MENU display.) 43 QQTG0692 . 2. 3. (Refer to page 155. Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to EFFECT. Press and hold the REVERB button for a few 1. • The procedure is the same as for MULTI EFFECT. seconds. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the name group. sound. Press the CHORUS button to turn it on. Press the REVERB button to turn it on. group. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect 2.” use the PAGE buttons to switch Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for pages.) set the depth of the effect.06_Part I. later recall. Use the buttons to the right of the display to select a type. • The procedure is the same as for MULTI 4. Use the buttons to the right of the display to 3. (Refer to page 42. of the effect group. • The display looks similar to the following. Press and hold the CHORUS button for a few Sounds and effects seconds. select a type.fm 43 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects REVERB CHORUS REVERB applies a reverberation effect to the Add breadth to the sound. • The EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect • EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group. • If the types comprise more than one display 䡲 EFFECT EDIT “page.) 䡲 EFFECT EDIT Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for later recall. (Refer to page 42. • The display changes to the following. CHORUS REVERB 䡲 Type and parameter settings 䡲 Type and parameter settings 1.

6. Set the PROGRAM MENUS button to ON. Set MIC EFFECT. Set the MIC REVERB. 06_Part I.fm 44 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects MIC You can add reverb and other effects to sound 3. PROGRAM MENUS 4. • You can specify whether or not to apply the reverb with the MIC REV ON/OFF button. • Connect a microphone to this instrument.) 1. 2. • Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an attribute. • The display looks similar to the following. • Enable or disable the effect using the MIC EFF ON/OFF button. Sounds and effects • The display will appear as follows: 5. • Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an attribute. Select the effect name (MIC REVERB/MIC EFFECT). and use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the corresponding setting. Select REVERB & EFFECT. and use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the corresponding setting. (Refer to page 188. Select MIC REVERB & EFFECT. 44 QQTG0692 . Set using the button on the left of the display. from a connected microphone.

end of the keyboard. for example. set the MOD- DOWN ULATION wheel to the MIN position. • The amount of pitch bend can be set. • When you release your hand from the wheel. move the produce the effect of bending the strings on a wheel up to add the effect. or during a normal performance for the sounds • The pitch bend effect does not function for the of the LEFT part.fm 45 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Controller Use the controllers (left next to the keyboard) to change the nuance of the sound while you are playing. PITCH BEND MODULATION (KN2600) The pitch of the instrument can be continuously The MODULATION wheel is used to apply a changed with the PITCH BEND wheel at the left vibrato effect. Using this control. Sounds and effects PITCH BEND UP MIN • When this effect is not needed. MODULATION While pressing a key on the keyboard. you can While pressing a key on the keyboard. it • The vibrato effect does not function for the returns automatically to the center position AUTO PLAY CHORD accompaniment pattern and the pitch bend effect is turned off. AUTO PLAY CHORD accompaniment pattern or during a normal performance for the sounds of the LEFT part. (Refer to page 149. • This effect differs depending on the selected sound. to the sound. move the MAX wheel up and down to control the pitch. guitar.06_Part I.) 45 QQTG0692 .

<Example: transposed to D> Played keys C major Notes that sound D major 46 QQTG0692 . for example—and decide you want to sing it. the key returns to C.fm 46 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Transpose The TRANSPOSE buttons are used to change the key of the entire instrument in semi-tone steps across an entire octave. or to use the TRANSPOSE feature. the transposed key is shown on the HOME PAGE display. • The key is changed in half-tone increments up to plus or minus one octave. TRANSPOSE Sounds and effects – + Adjust the key with the + and – buttons. • When the TRANSPOSE function is active. • If the two buttons are pressed at the same time. only to find that it’s either too high or too low for your voice. Your choice is to either learn the song all over again in a different key. 06_Part I. Suppose you learn to play a song—in the key of C.

niment. 䊳 buttons to select the har- mony style. 2. Your TECHNI-CHORD perfor. • This feature is very effective when used with • When the OCTAVE. RIGHT 2). Press and hold the TECHNI-CHORD button for a few seconds. • The melody you play with your right hand is automatically played in chords which are based on the chords you play with your left hand. a suitable TECHNI-CHORD type will be selected automatically. please set to one or the other. HARD ROCK or FAN- the AUTO PLAY CHORD. In other words. TECHNI- CHORD 3. 47 QQTG0692 . the harmony notes are produced in the sound of the RIGHT 1 part.06_Part I. Press the TECHNI-CHORD button to turn it 1. • In the case of EASY RECORD (see page 77). the TECHNI-CHORD functions even when the keyboard is not split. Play the keyboard. If TECHNI-CHORD is part of a ONE TOUCH PLAY or MUSIC STYLIST registration. so when you use EASY RECORD. the harmony notes are produced in the same sound as the melody notes. ▲. Type setting 2. Example: Left hand (chord) C D G C Sounds and effects Right hand (melody) 1. 1. the sounds produced by the automatic accompa. • The display looks similar to the following. FARE style is selected.fm 47 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分 Part I Sounds and effects Techni-chord TECHNI-CHORD turns your single note melodies into full chords and offers you a choice of different types from a simple duet which adds one harmony note to your melody note. Use the 䊴. ▼. the TECHNI-CHORD sound is not sounds different from the sounds you play and recorded. Split the keyboard into left and right sections. mony tones. on. the harmony notes are produced in the sounds of the part which is currently selected in the CONDUC- TOR (RIGHT 1. to big band reeds which adds four harmony notes to your melody note. Use the ORCHESTRATOR ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the part for the harmony notes. when set to CONDUCTOR or a part other than mance is enhanced by selecting harmony PART 4. • If CONDUCTOR is selected. 䡲 ORCHESTRATOR You can specify which part is used for the har. If both RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 are on.

VARIATION 2 PANEL setting VARIATION 3 PANEL setting VARIATION 4 PANEL setting Playing the rhythm • In the MUSIC STYLIST (page 60) and MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER (page 62) etc. 07_Part II. (Refer to page 52. The combination of all of these is the rhythm.). but also of accompaniment patterns All of these together comprise one STYLE.fm 48 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Overview of rhythm performance An explanation follows of the terms related to this instrument’s rhythm performance. Rhythm and accompaniment Rhythm and Style pattern One rhythm of this instrument is comprised of four VARIATION patterns. this STYLE is summoned. pattern. and for each one the Each rhythm is comprised of not only a DRUMS optimum sounds and effects are set. called BASS and ACCOMP. STYLE • The accompaniment pattern sounds when RHYTHM you perform using the AUTO PLAY CHORD PANEL setting VARIATION 1 (APC). 48 QQTG0692 .

(If it is on.fm 49 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Selecting rhythms Many exciting rhythms are stored in the memory of this instrument. There are four variations available for each rhythm. off. select a 䡲 VARIATION rhythm group. 2. 49 QQTG0692 . use the PAGE buttons to move from one screen page to another. press it once to turn it rhythms you create with the COMPOSER. Use the VARIATION buttons to select RHYTHM GROUP POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD the desired variation. First select one of the rhythm groups and then choose the desired rhythm.) • The nuance of the pattern differs with each variation number.) (Refer to page 111. MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ VARIATION 1 2 3 4 JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY Playing the rhythm LOAD • Confirm that the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER • MEMORY is the group in which you store the button is off. Select the desired rhythm from the list on the • You can change to a different variation while display. the rhythm is playing. • If there is more than one page to the display. In the RHYTHM GROUP section. Select a rhythm 1.07_Part II.

To start the rhythm. and the tempo automatically 3. press a key to the left of the specified split point. • The rhythm pattern begins to play. the TEMPO/PROGRAM cannot be used to 䡲 Synchronized start adjust the tempo. 2.fm 50 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Start the rhythm There are two ways to start the rhythm. • The tempo is shown on the display as a • The BEAT indicators above the START/STOP numerical value ( q = 40 to 300). Play a key to the left of the keyboard split changes correspondingly. • When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. the TEMPO/PROGRAM buttons. point. With the synchronized start feature. refer to page 81. TAP TEMPO SYNCHRO & BREAK • The tempo at which the button is tapped is detected. this button few times with your finger at the tempo you wish to play. 07_Part II. Select a rhythm. • You can use the synchronized start feature even when the keyboard is not divided into left and right sections. 䡲 Normal start 䡲 Adjust the tempo The tempo of the rhythm pattern is adjusted with 1. Playing the rhythm pattern starts when you play a key on the key- board. 50 QQTG0692 . TEMPO/ PROGRAM START/STOP 1 2 3 4 BEAT • The selected rhythm pattern immediately begins to play. 2. the rhythm • To adjust the tempo during playback. button light to indicate the beat. 䡲 TAP TEMPO You can set the tempo of the rhythm by tapping 1. Select a rhythm. Press the START/STOP button to turn it on. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn it on. • You can stop the rhythm by pressing the START/STOP button again to turn it off.

1. • A fill-in pattern is heard immediately for the remainder of the measure.07_Part II. • When a FILL IN button is pressed on the last beat of the measure. Press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button. Press the START/STOP button to start the rhythm. the fill-in pattern con- tinues to the end of the following measure. fill-in and ending patterns fitting each different rhythm pattern are permanently recorded in your Keyboard. FILL IN You can insert a fill-in pattern any time during the 1. • A spoken one-measure count is played. Press the MODE button in the AUTO PLAY CHORD section to turn it on. VOICE: A spoken count (initialized setting). Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP 2 button. Playing the rhythm START/STOP 1 2 3 4 BEAT 2. mode. after which the nor. Press the COUNT INTRO (FILL IN 2) button rhythm performance. CLICK: A clicking sound for the count. FILL IN 1. COUNT 2. 51 QQTG0692 . Choose from two different to turn it on. thus allowing a versatile rhythm performance.fm 51 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Playing the rhythm Intro. INTRO FILL IN 1 2 2. Use the COUNT INTRO button to select a • An intro pattern is played. AUTO PLAY CHORD MODE OFF/ON INTRO & ENDING CHORD FINDER 1 2 • The display looks similar to the following. fill-in patterns. 2. Begin the rhythm performance with an intro pat- tern. after SEQUENCER RESET COUNT INTRO which the normal rhythm pattern begins. COUNT INTRO You can begin the rhythm performance with a spoken one-measure count. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO & ENDING 2 button to turn it on. mal rhythm pattern begins. INTRO 䡲 Mode setting You can select the mode for the count sound. Press the START/STOP button to start the rhythm. 1.

The ending pattern stops. • The volume of each part can be adjusted with the buttons below the display. and a fill-in pattern is produced. ACCOMP 1–5. 2.fm 52 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm ENDING Finish the rhythm performance with an ending pattern. • The accompaniment pattern of the AUTO PLAY CHORD is composed of 8 parts: DRUMS 1. Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP button. 1. 2. after which the normal rhythm per- formance continues. • If you accidentally press the INTRO & END- ING button in the middle of the tune. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO & ENDING 2 button to turn it on.) 52 QQTG0692 . (Refer to page 30. With a real accompaniment as a background. the AUTO PLAY CHORD function automatically plays an accompaniment pattern which matches perfectly the selected rhythm. 07_Part II. BASS. you can concentrate on playing the melody. How the AUTO PLAY CHORD works When an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is selected. and then the rhythm performance stops. an automatic accompaniment which matches the rhythm you have chosen is played Chord Melody in the chord which you specify with your left hand. you can press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button. The melody is played with your right hand. Playing the rhythm Auto Play Chord Simply by playing a chord on the keyboard. INTRO & ENDING 1 2 • An ending pattern is produced.

<one finger> In the <one-finger>. black key and a white key to the left of it. seventh and minor seventh chords are also easily produced. be used to specify chords <fingered> (ADVANCE) for the automatic accompaniment.fm 53 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Playing chords Choose from the 4 ways of playing chords. white key to the left of it. the entire keyboard can ing all the notes in the chord. chords can be speci- fied either with one finger <one finger> or by Example: C chord pressing all of the chord's sound components <fingered>. if you press a key a perfect 5th or more below the lowest note of the chord. With this mode. Switch will play the currently specified chord in • It recognizes many more chords than the that timing. • It recognizes many more chords than the BASIC mode’s <fingered> chords. a major chord can be played 䡲 BASIC mode just by pressing the key for its root note. for unrecognizable chords. it plays other chords are played. based on that note. • The accompaniment continues in the same 䡲 ADVANCED 2 mode chord as long as the Foot Switch is This mode accepts chords specified with <fin. ance on a solo melody. In the PIANIST mode. minor chord seventh chord minor seventh chord Play the root note plus a Play the root note plus a Play the root note plus a black key to the left of it. allowing you to focus your perform- BASIC mode’s <fingered> chords. you specify the chord by play. <fingered> 䡲 PIANIST mode In the <fingered>. the BASS part becomes a pattern • Play at least three notes to specify the chord.07_Part II. refer pressed. 䡲 ADVANCED 1 mode <APC HOLD> This mode accepts chords specified with <fin. it is recognized as a <fingered> chord. depressed. pressing the Foot specifications. This mode lets beginners specify chords with just one finger. If this function is assigned to the Foot Switch gered> and disregards all unrecognizable chord (sold separately). Minor. for example. 53 QQTG0692 . and the keyboard does not split. the auto accompaniment according to the keys • To change the Foot Switch assignment. • When specifying chords. Example: Cm Example: C7 Example: Cm7 Playing the rhythm • When three or more keys of a chord are pressed. to page 172. and it does not change even if gered> and. a RIGHT part is assigned to all the keys.

) MODE OFF/ON • In the initialized condition.fm 54 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm How to use the AUTO PLAY CHORD 1. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON • You can set the mode which determines how button to turn it on. set the OFF/ON button to off. with the ON BASS button on. 䡲 MEMORY Press the MEMORY button and select either one Playing the rhythm of the following: ON: Even when removing your finger from 4. previous display. set the tempo. INTRO and ENDING. accompaniment is playing but is not retained when stopped. 07_Part II. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode . To stop the automatic accompaniment. • An accompaniment pattern in the specified chord is automatically played. If the ON BASS button is ON. (Refer to page 50. if • If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was you play a C chord by pressing the keys G. specify the chord on the keyboard and E. thus making it possible to play chords such as C on G. 6. Press the START/STOP button to begin the 䡲 ON BASS rhythm. when the rhythm is off. the present chord is retained • After a few seconds. Specify a chord. and • When you use FILL IN. Select the desired rhythm and sound(s). selected. the chord • If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was is deleted. C selected. 2. • For example.) played chord. the BASS part is • You can start the rhythm by playing a key on produced in the key of the lowest note of the the keyboard. (Refer to the next AUTO PLAY CHORD page. G. Left hand 54 QQTG0692 . press • The display looks similar to the following. • If you wish the automatic accompaniment to begin and end the performance. the specified root note (R. 7. OFF: When removing your finger. the automatic accompaniment is also used in these patterns. the BASS part is produced in the key of section to the left of the split point. the keys.) 3. the START/STOP button. if an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is on and CHORD FINDER a chord is specified. the display returns to the until the next chord is specified. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE but- ton to turn it on. Example of how to play a BASIC <One-Finger> accompaniment Play the melody with C F G C your right hand. The volumes of these notes can be adjusted. 5. the keyboard automatically splits AUTO: The chord is retained when auto into right and left sections. (Refer to page 30. the LEFT part sounds during an AUTO PLAY CHORD performance. Play the melody with your right hand. BASS part) and chord notes (CHORD part) are produced.

the LEFT part turns Playing the rhythm off. 3. otherwise the • The display changes to the following. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE but- ton to turn it on. when you do not know which keys to press to TOR is on during a performance with the BASIC specify a given chord.fm 55 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Left Hold CHORD FINDER This setting determines how the LEFT part The CHORD FINDER can help. Press the MODE button to turn it on. the LEFT part continues to play even when the keys are released. • When the mode is set to ON. • Touch response does not function for the LEFT part. ON: Specifying <one-finger> chords in the BASIC 2. Use the LEFT HOLD: ON/OFF button to set the mode to on or off. AUTO PLAY CHORD MODE OFF/ON CHORD FINDER 2. but it will sound if you turn it on. • When BASIC is selected. (Continued on the next page) 55 QQTG0692 .07_Part II. mode produces the full chords. Select CHORD FINDER. • When BASIC is selected the LEFT part turns off. • The display changes to the following. • The display changes to the following. during a rhythm performance. Use the APC MODE button to select the auto- matic accompaniment mode you will use to specify chords (BASIC. ADVANCED 1). for example. 1. The LEFT part sounds if you turn it on. sounds when the LEFT button in the CONDUC. LEFT part notes are those of the pressed chord keys. the CHORD FINDER shows you which keys to press and even lets you hear the notes 1. • In the list column are shown the chords which can be specified in each mode. but <one-finger> chords cannot be specified. name. When you input the chord or ADVANCED mode. that make up. OFF: The LEFT part sounds from the pressed chord keys.

When the keys are pressed again. the MEMORY (APC SELECT) in order. this button is not shown on the display. different INVERSION fingerings are illustrated • At this time. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode. press the EXIT button. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn • When the button with a picture of an ear is it on. • Each time the INVERSION button is pressed. pressed. the rhythm starts when the type of chord. To exit the CHORD FINDER procedure. 56 QQTG0692 . (The octave of the illustrated keys and that of the SYNCHRO & BREAK played tones may differ. • The automatic accompaniment stops. the rhythm starts from the first beat. Specify a chord. Use the ROOT buttons to select the root note BREAK function of the chord. the left keyboard is played and stops when the • A typical way to finger the specified chord fingers are removed from the keys. • The automatic accompaniment begins to play (synchronized start). the notes of the chord sound. for the specified chord. Playing the rhythm 4.) 5.fm 56 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm 4. • For the PIANIST mode. (TYPICAL) is illustrated on a keyboard dia- gram. 1. 07_Part II. play the keys to the left of the currently set split point.) 2. Release the chord keys. 3. (If there is no INVERSION fingering button should be OFF. Use the TYPE buttons to select With the break function.

1.07_Part II. Play the keyboard or press the START/STOP FADE OUT button to turn it off. button. gradually fades to nothing. Turn on the FADE OUT button at the point you 2. • During the fade-in. • If you wish to interrupt the fade-out. Turn on the FADE IN button. and then goes out. • At the end of the fade-in. ance. 1. the volume of each At the end of the song. umes for all parts change to 0 and no sound is • The indicator flashes to show that fade-out is produced from this instrument until the FADE completed. Start the performance. the volume of each part part rises slowly. Set up the panel settings for your perform. the FADE IN indica- tor goes out. press the 3. • The volumes of all the parts slowly fade to 0. The volumes IN is turned off or until step 3 is executed. for all parts return to their specified settings. turn on the FADE IN button before pressing the START/STOP button. In this condition.fm 57 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Fade In/Fade Out Add interest to your performance by starting a part with a fade-in or ending it with a fade-out. • The volume slowly builds to its preset level. • For the fade-in effect for a rhythm part or when playing back a SEQUENCER performance. FADE IN FADE OUT At the beginning of the song. want the fade-out to start. 2. FADE IN is shown in the upper right part of the normal display. FADE FADE IN OUT IN OUT Playing the rhythm • The indicator flashes. 57 QQTG0692 . • KN2600: does not work for the SD-AUDIO data playback. the vol.

Auto Reset: Specify whether the volume of each part automatically returns to its specified setting (ON. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the set- ting. FADE IN Time: FADE Specify the time elapsed between 0 volume IN OUT to the set volume (1 measure to 16 mea- sure). OFF). FADE OUT Time: • The display looks similar to the following. (Refer to page 171. OFF). 1. Specify the time elapsed between the set volume and 0 volume (1 measure to 16 measure). Rhythm Auto stop: Specify whether the rhythm turns off after fade-out is completed (ON. 07_Part II. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item. Press and hold the FADE IN or FADE OUT button for a few seconds. OUT.fm 58 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm FADE SET Adjust the settings for the FADE IN and FADE 2. OFF). • The display returns to the previous display a few seconds after you have changed the set- tings. • You can also access this display from the CONTROL MENU display. SEQ Auto stop: Playing the rhythm Specify whether the SEQUENCER play- back automatically stops after fade-out is completed (ON.) 58 QQTG0692 .

press the SET button to turn it off. SOUND ARRANGER SET OFF/ON SOUND ARRANGER SET OFF/ON 2. select sounds from the DRUM KITS group. press the OFF/ON button to turn it on. 1. • For the DRUMS part. • Do not select the MEMORY button. 59 QQTG0692 . In the SOUND ARRANGER. Select the rhythm whose sound you wish to Playing back the sounds change. Start the rhythm (automatic accompaniment). press the SET button to turn it on. Playing the rhythm • This setting can be set separately for each rhythm. 3.fm 59 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Sound Arranger The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY CHORD parts of each rhythm. 2. while the OFF/ON button is on. In the SOUND ARRANGER. 5. • The DIGITAL EFFECT on/off status can also be specified (except for DRUMS part). 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other parts as desired. • The sounds marked with # cannot be changed. Select the desired sound. • The display looks similar to the following. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the part whose sound you wish to change. • When the OFF/ON button is off. the factory- preset sounds are produced. When you have finished selecting the sounds. 1. 4. press the SET button to turn it on. • If you wish to modify the settings you speci- fied.07_Part II. • The sound and on/off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT are shown on the display.

and the sounds and effects. 2. ONE TOUCH PLAY • During setting. 60 QQTG0692 . Use the CATEGORY ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a category. • Do not select the MEMORY button. • The display looks similar to the following. 1. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it 2. 1. 07_Part II. 3. Select MUSICAL CATEGORY. • When you specify a chord. Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY button for a few seconds. you can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨ buttons to skip to the previous or follow- ing subcategory. Setup by music style Select a style from the MUSICAL CATEGORY. MUSIC STYLIST • The display looks similar to the following. • During the search. that are ideal for your selected rhythm are automatically set. Music Stylist MUSIC STYLIST sets up your instrument with a suitable registration for a specific style of music or tune. 4. • The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO & BREAK are automatically turned on. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a music style. Playing the rhythm tempo etc. on. the automatic rhythm begins to play immediately. Select a rhythm pattern. 3. volume balances. the style name is shown on the display. Play the keyboard.fm 60 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm One Touch Play ONE TOUCH PLAY automatically sets a suggested combination of sounds and an appropriate tempo for your chosen rhythm style.

volume balances. which are best suited for the selected music style are automatically selected. Play the keyboard. 1. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a style. and the sounds. and the sounds. next page of styles. • When you specify a chord. which are best suited for the selected style are • The display looks similar to the following. Select ALPHABETICAL LIST. Playing the rhythm 3. 2. • When you specify a chord. 4. the automatic rhythm begins to play immediately. Select MUSICAL ERA. • You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨ buttons to skip to the previous or following era. volume balances. 5. rhythm and tempo etc. • You can use the MORE button to view the • The display looks similar to the following. which are best suited for the selected style are automatically selected. Setup by alphabetical order You can use alphabetical or numerical search to select a style name. the automatic rhythm begins to play immediately. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it • You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨ buttons to skip on. rhythm and tempo etc. to the previous or following alphabetical or numerical heading. style. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a rhythm begins to play immediately. automatically selected. 61 QQTG0692 . 2. 4. effects.fm 61 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm • The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO & BREAK turn on. • The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO & BREAK turn on. Play the keyboard. • When you specify a chord. the automatic 3. • You can use the MORE button to view the next page of styles. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it • The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO on. & BREAK turn on. effects. effects. Setup by era You can select a style from a specific music era. volume balances.07_Part II. and the sounds. Play the keyboard. rhythm and tempo etc. 1.

the automatic rhythm begins to play immediately. How to use the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER 1. or ALPHABETICAL LIST (ALPHA- BET) display. When you recall the PANEL MEMORY settings. • After deciding on a style with the MUSIC STYLIST. Music Style Arranger Playing the rhythm The MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER helps you to make professional registration changes during your perfor- mance. the same style name is copied to the PANEL MEMORY (up to 16 characters). When a key on the left section of the keyboard is pressed. 3. this style name is shown at the top of the normal display. The MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER will also alter the accompaniment in character with the registration change creating a pol- ished sounding arrangement. change according to the selected rhythm and music style. or let your instrument change the registration automatically for you when you use FILL IN 1 or 2. • After selecting a style. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a style • During your performance. but the tempo does not change. turn the MUSIC STYLIST button off if you wish to have the normal display active during a performance. Press the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button • The panel settings (including the tempo) to turn it on. • The nuance of the pattern differs with each number. 07_Part II. The AUTO PLAY CHORD.fm 62 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm • On the MUSICAL CATEGORY. if you record the settings in the PANEL MEMORY. MUSICAL ERA. you can move freely to each display using the buttons to the right of the display. changed. the style can be (1 to 4). the MUSIC STYLE MEMORY button and the SYNCHRO & ARRANGER BREAK button are automatically turned on. 2. Select a rhythm pattern. Select between four contrasting registrations at the push of a button. MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER VARIATION 1 2 3 4 62 QQTG0692 .

change. the display exits the set- ting mode. You can store your desired panel settings in the PANEL MEMORY beforehand and switch from one to another quickly. RANGER button for a few seconds. effects. 2. Select the mode.07_Part II. • You can also access this setting display from the CONTROL MENU display. PANEL MEMORY: The PANEL MEMORY number (BANK A: 1 to 4) changes.fm 63 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm How to change the music style during your performance While you are playing the keyboard with the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER on. etc. the FILL IN 1 pattern plays. • After a few seconds. the FILL IN 2 pattern plays. rhythms. and then the style changes in the 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 4 order.) 63 QQTG0692 . and then the music style changes in the 4 ➝ 3 ➝ 2 ➝ 1 order. • The display changes to the following. Press and hold the MUSIC STYLE AR. SOUND & RHYTHM: The sound. 䡲 MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER mode You can define which panel settings change by pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER is used. And each time the FILL IN 2 button is pressed. RHYTHM: Only the rhythm changes. press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button. (Refer to page 171. Playing the rhythm 1. FILL IN 1 2 SEQUENCER COUNT RESET INTRO • Each time the FILL IN 1 button is pressed.

1. number buttons (1 to 8) for a few seconds. 4. How to store the panel settings By storing all the panel settings you use for a 䡲 BANK VIEW song in the same bank.fm 64 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Panel Memory PANEL MEMORY stores all the current panel settings so you can recall them at the push of a button. 64 QQTG0692 . press one of the numbered buttons of the PANEL MEMORY (1 to 8). 3. Set up the desired panel settings (sounds. vol- umes. PANEL MEMORY 1 2 3 4 SET BANK VIEW 5 6 7 8 NEXT BANK • The panel settings are now stored in the spec- ified bank and number. C). the memory names of that bank’s 8 memories. BANK VIEW • You can use the BANK ∧ and ∨ buttons to view other banks. for example. Press the BANK VIEW button to turn it on. B. 07_Part II. With the SET button held down. Select the desired bank (A. you can After selecting a bank. Playing the rhythm • You can also access this display by pressing and holding any of the PANEL MEMORY • The BANK SELECT display appears.) 2. etc. you can use the PAGE switch from one panel setup to the next in a buttons to go to the PAGE 2/2 page and confirm flash.

. • The “Control Preset” bank of the PERFORM- ANCE PADS or the Foot Switch (sold sepa- rately) can also be used to change from one PANEL MEMORY setup to another. etc. 65 QQTG0692 . or the MEMORY NAMING button for the memory. Use the PAGE buttons to go to the PAGE 2/2 • The panel setup changes to the one stored in page on the display.. Select a bank.fm 65 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm Assign a name to the bank/memory Recall the panel setup You can assign names to the banks and memo. • Press the →← button to center the name. and memory name are shown in the top line on the normal display. 2. 2. the contents of the mem- ory remain unchanged until you store them again. 4. • Set the character input position with the POSI- TION buttons. • The panel settings change when a PANEL • Press the DEL button to erase the character at MEMORY number button (1 to 8) is pressed. 1. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire name. ries. manually. the cursor position.) name to the bank. Use the buttons below the display to assign a NEXT BANK name. Press the desired PANEL MEMORY number button (1 to 8). 1. • You can then change the sound settings. 5. select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name assignment. the bank indication changes in order (A ➝ B • Press the INS button to enter a space at the ➝ C ➝ A ➝ B . This allows you to change banks without exiting the normal display.07_Part II. When you have finished assigning the name. press the OK button. however. • Switch from upper to lower case letters with • Each time the NEXT BANK button is pressed. abc button. Press the BANK NAMING button to assign a pages 64. Press the BANK VIEW button to turn it on. • The currently selected bank. Playing the rhythm 䡲 NEXT BANK You can press the NEXT BANK button to switch to the next bank.). the ABC. cursor position. 172. the specified memory. (Refer to 3. memory number • The display looks similar to the following. Select a bank or memory.

Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE 2/3– 3/3 EXPAND MODE FILTER display. 3. etc. Press and hold the SET button for a few sec- onds. 1. 䡲 EXPAND MODE FILTER You can specify which data is stored in the EXPAND mode. 07_Part II. 66 QQTG0692 . and CON- DUCTOR status are stored. • The display changes to the following. 1. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the item.fm 66 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分 Part II Playing the rhythm PANEL MEMORY mode You can define which panel settings are recalled when the PANEL MEMORY is used. TRANSPOSE. Select the mode. Use the ON and OFF buttons to store the on or off status for the selected item. NORMAL: The sounds and volume balance. the display exits the set- ting mode. 2. tempo. 2. • After a few seconds. EXPAND: All the instrument’s settings are stored. includ- Playing the rhythm ing the rhythm (except for SOUND AR- RANGER on/off status). • The display looks similar to the following.

Just by pressing one of ing your performance. Use the PAGE buttons to change the page. 3. • “Compile Bank” 1 and 2 are for assigning Performance Pads • To stop the phrase before it has ended. you can insert a short recorded phrase or effect sounds by pressing a pad but- ton. 5: PANEL MEMORY BANK DECREMENT several phrases are played in the specified 6: PANEL MEMORY INCREMENT chord.08_Part III. is shown in the normal display. When using BANK the PANEL MEMORY. • Various functions are assigned to each pad • Some phrases continue to play until the STOP button in “Control Preset”. A different group of phrases is recorded in each bank. some phrases 3: GLIDE may play in time with the measure count. 1. set the AUTO SETTING button to OFF. and pad button 6 a minor chord progres- genre of that bank. tempo. Press a pad button (1 to 6). the phrase changes following • Pad button 5 accesses a major chord progres- a chord progression that is typical for the music sion. • “User Bank” A. Press the BANK button.fm 67 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Performance Pads Playing phrases During your performance. • The volume can be set with the buttons below the normal display (PADS). press phrases as you desire. 67 QQTG0692 . SOLO Pad buttons 5 and 6 (SOLO) are phrases with • Use with the automatic accompaniment dur- chord progressions. sion. B and C are for storing your • The selected phrase is played in the current original phrases. button is pressed (the [Loop] indication 1: ROTARY SLOW/FAST appears). 4: PANEL MEMORY DECREMENT • When the automatic accompaniment is on. PADS BANK of the EXPAND MODE FILTER. the STOP button. • When using the “Control Preset” bank. • Information about the phrase. such as its name and the measure number. 2: PANEL MEMORY BANK INCREMENT • During a rhythm performance. these pad buttons. Select the desired bank from the display. turn off the PER- FORM. 1 PERFORMANCE PADS 2 3 • The list of banks consists of three screen pages. 4 6 SOLO 5 • A different phrase is assigned to each pad but- ton. 2.

Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it on. Select PHRASE COPY. the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER and the MUSIC STYLIST. the bank automati- cally changes according to the automatic setting functions in the ONE TOUCH PLAY. USER BANK: Bank name (USER A. • If you wish to modify a portion of the copied phrase. Select the pad you wish to copy to. C) PAD: Pad number (1 to 6) 2. 7. from the SEQUENCER to each pad memory of a “User Bank”. 68 QQTG0692 . B. When it is set to off.fm 68 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Peformance Pads AUTO SETTING When this button is set to on. Select the pad you wish to copy from. 08_Part III. Select PERFORMANCE PADS. • Only a SOLO phrase can be copied to the • The display looks similar to the following. PROGRAM MENUS 4. 3. 1. Performance Pads • Use the buttons on the FROM side to set the • The display looks similar to the following. as phrases. PHRASE COPY Copy a phrase from one pad to another. Press the OK button. the bank does not automati- cally change according to these functions. BANK: Bank name PAD: Pad number (1 to 6) 5. • The display looks similar to the following. • Chord data also can be copied to pad buttons 5 and 6 (SOLO). SOLO pads (5 and 6). 6. • Use the buttons on the TO side to set the desired settings. press the EDIT button to change to the recording display. desired settings. AUTO SETTING Copying phrases You can copy the desired data. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off.

Select PERFORMANCE PADS. the measures are blank. the chord (STEP) track is automatically displayed. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off. 69 QQTG0692 . Press the OK button. set TRANSPOSE to the key of C and then copy the phrase. When you have completed the procedure. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it The part to copy to. data from a disk. The name of the bank (A/B/C). 133. TRACK: The track number to copy from. 5. TRANSPOSE: The setting to transpose the chords when they are copied. 3. PART: 2. FIRST MEASURE: Performance Pads The first measure of the phrase you wish to copy. song number.08_Part III. YES button if you wish to copy the phrase. • For information about loading data. • The maximum that can be copied is 16 mea- sures. Pad button number (1 to 6). • A confirmation display appears. Select the measures of SEQUENCER data you wish to copy from. Select the pad button you wish to copy to. • When copying to pad button 5 or 6. Select SEQ TO PAD COPY. 8. 7. on. • If you wish to convert the chords during play- back. • On the SEQUENCER side. use the buttons to make the corresponding settings. However. Press the • The display looks similar to the following. please do not change the buttons to make the corresponding settings. • On the PERFORMANCE PAD side. 4. LAST MEASURE: The last measure of the phrase you wish to copy.fm 69 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Peformance Pads SEQ TO PAD COPY 1. USER BANK: refer to page 73. Record a phrase in the SEQUENCER. refer to PAD: pages 120. or load 6. • For details about SEQUENCER operation. or press the NO button to cancel the procedure. when chord data from step record input does not exist. and the chord data is also copied. use the • After this procedure.

70 QQTG0692 . Repeat steps 5 and 6 to assign phrases to the other pad buttons. • The display looks similar to the following. • The display looks similar to the following. MENUS 7. Select PERFORMANCE PADS. PROGRAM • The “Control” bank cannot be selected. Performance Pads 3. 1. to select the desired bank and phrase you wish to assign. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it 6. When you have finished assigning the phrases. Use the PADS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the pad to which to assign the phrase.fm 70 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Peformance Pads Compile You can assign desired phrases from different banks in “Compile Bank” 1 and 2. 08_Part III. Press the BANK button to select a bank (Com- pile Bank: 1/2). Use the BANK and PHRASE ∧ and ∨ buttons on. Select COMPILE SET. • You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to the bank. 2. turn off the PROGRAM MENUS but- • The display looks similar to the following. 5. 8. 4. ton.

• Press the button for PART 1 or PART 2. • The display changes to the RECORD PAD display. 4. • For details about CHORD MODIFY CHANGE.) 3. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons specify the number of measures in the phrase. B and C are reserved for storing your original phrases. • The recording procedure is the same as for the COMPOSER. refer to page • The display looks similar to the following. • You can also copy phrases which are recorded in the SEQUENCER. 8. (Refer to page 104. on. • To clear all the current data in the selected pad. Proceed to record. if LOOP is set to OFF. Select the part to record to. • The display looks similar to the following. Use the buttons below the display to select the pad number to record. • If the BANK CLR button is pressed. 71 QQTG0692 . 1.08_Part III. • The display looks similar to the following. Press the OK button. Select PERFORMANCE PADS. 5. 111. • You can press the BANK NAMING button and Performance Pads assign a name to the bank. Use the buttons to the left of the display to • In the PLAY SETTING. • For details about KEY SETTING. refer to page 109. all the data in the bank is cleared (a confirmation dis- play appears). Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it 6. 2.fm 71 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Peformance Pads Record a phrase “User Bank” A. • Two parts can be recorded (PAD 1–4). 7. press the CLEAR THE PAD button. LOOP recording is not possible. select a RECORDING BANK. • You can press the PAD NAMING button and assign a name to the bank. Use the TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time signature of the phrase. • The display changes to the PAD RECORD- ING display. and then press the YES button on the confirmation display.

SYNCHRO: • The cursor moves in 1/8-note increments. 3. 1. OFF: Performance Pads The phrase is played back only once. is played back repeatedly until the STOP button is pressed. Use the LOOP ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or chord progression. move ON: the cursor to the specific chord and press the Once the pad button is pressed. 08_Part III. disable loop playback. the phrase playback begins in time with the measure. A chord progression can be stored in PAD 5 and PAD 6. The phrase starts to play immediately when the pad button is pressed. 72 QQTG0692 . • The display looks similar to the following. Press the OK button. the phrase ERS button. Use the START ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a playback mode. Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cur- sor to the position you wish to input. press the CHORD STEP RECORD button. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to store the rest of the 3. 2. 5. • To delete a chord which has been input.fm 72 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分 Part III Peformance Pads PLAY SETTING CHORD STEP RECORD Select a playback mode. On the PAD RECORDING display. 2. 1. regardless of the 4. On the REALTIME RECORDING display. press the PLAY SETTING button. INSTANT: • The chord name is shown. • The display looks similar to the following. Input the chord by playing it on the keyboard. rhythm. During a rhythm performance.

09_Part IV.fm 73 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分

Part IV Sequencer
Outline of the Sequencer

A sequencer records your performance in a similar way to a tape recorder. This instrument’s
SEQUENCER allows you to record up to 10 performances in a variety of ways. You may want to record
your entire performance in one go (especially if you are using AUTO PLAY CHORD to provide the
accompaniment), or to build up a complex arrangement with several different parts playing together, like
an orchestral score. This instrument’s SEQUENCER has 16 tracks. This means that you can record 16
different parts. However, you don’t have to use all 16 tracks. For some uses you may only need to use
one or two tracks. This instrument’s SEQUENCER enables you to edit your recorded performance. Unlike
a tape recorder you can change the sound or the tempo during playback, or correct wrong notes or timing
errors.

SEQUENCER features Popular features
 You can change the tempo without  Simplified recording method
changing the pitch EASY RECORD is a feature that allows you to
When you record your performance at a slow bypass the more complex recording procedures
tempo and play it back at a faster tempo, the so you can record and play back your perform-
pitch stays the same. ance quickly and easily.
• You can also record an accompaniment from
 Consistent sound the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
Your performance is reproduced by a sound
module as it reads digital data. So, unlike a  Create a one-man ensemble
recorded tape, the sound never deteriorates no Use the REALTIME RECORD function to record
matter how many times you play back your per- your performance in up to 16 tracks and create
formance. your own orchestra or band.

 Edit your recorded performance  Store individual data to create your song
Comprehensive editing functions allow you to For repeating patterns or those especially com-
modify your recorded performance. Data can plicated phrases, the STEP RECORD feature is
easily be erased, corrected or copied, providing convenient for recording the notes one-by-one.
an especially convenient tool for creating your • This method can be used to store both the
original tunes. chord progression for the automatic accompa-
niment and the rhythm changes.
 Instant search
A recorded tape has to be rewound, but digital Memory capacity
action means you can return to the beginning of
Sequencer

your performance, or find any measure, instantly. Up to 10 songs can be stored in the
SEQUENCER. Expressed in terms of notes, the
total number of notes which can be stored in all
the SEQUENCER songs and tracks is about
40,000. The remaining memory available for
recording is shown on the display as a percent-
age (MEMORY= %).
• When “Memory full!” appears on the display,
no more data can be stored in the
SEQUENCER.

73
QQTG0692

09_Part IV.fm 74 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分

Part IV Sequencer

SEQUENCER menu <RECORD & EDIT>
The configuration of the SEQUENCER setting
display is as follows.

1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS

<COPY & PASTE>

• The display looks similar to the following.

<RANGE EDIT>

2. Select SEQUENCER.
• The display looks similar to the following.

(KN2600)
• The SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons are used to select
a song.
• You can press the NAMING button and assign
a name to the song. (Refer to page 83.)
• You can press the PANEL WRITE button to
store the current settings of the instrument at
the beginning of the song. (Refer to page 83.)
• KN2600: Pressing the SD AUDIO SYNCHRO
button will set the synchronization of the
SEQUENCER playback and the sound data
stored in the SD card. (Refer to page 103.)
Sequencer

3. Select RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE or
RANGE SET, and follow the corresponding
procedure.

74
QQTG0692

09_Part IV.fm 75 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分

Part IV Sequencer

Summary of the SEQUENCER menu items
RECORD & EDIT TRACK MERGE (page 98)
These functions are recording and editing Merge the recorded contents of two tracks
operations used for creating a new perfor- and store in a third track.
mance. TRACK CLEAR (page 97)
REALTIME RECORD (page 78) Erase the contents of a specific track.
Record each part of your performance just SONG CLEAR (page 97)
as you play it on the keyboard. Erase all the recorded data of a song.
PUNCH RECORD (page 84) MEASURE COPY (page 98)
Correct a selected portion of your recorded Copy the contents of specific measures.
performance.
MEASURE ERASE (page 99)
STEP RECORD (page 86) Erase the contents of specific measures.
Store the sounds note-by-note on the dis-
play. MEASURE DELETE (page 99)
• You can also store the chord or rhythm pro- Delete specific measures from the perfor-
gression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD. mance.
TRACK ASSIGN (page 91) MEASURE INSERT (page 100)
Assign parts to tracks. Insert additional measures in the perfor-
mance.
QUANTIZE (page 92)
Correct the timing of your performance. APC TO SMF CONVERT (page 100)
Save automatic accompaniment patterns
SONG SELECT (page 84) and pad performance data in a Standard
Select a song. MIDI File (SMF).
SONG CLEAR (page 93)
Erase all the recorded data of a song. RANGE EDIT
TRACK CLEAR (page 93) Change the note position etc. in the recorded
Erase the contents of a specific track. data.
NOTE EDIT (page 94) QUANTIZE (page 96)
Store and correct performance (NOTE) Correct the timing of your performance.
data on a piano roll display. NOTE CHANGE (page 101)
DRUM EDIT (page 95) Change the pitch of specific notes.
Store and correct DRUMS part data on a VELOCITY CHANGE (page 102)
special display. Modify the recorded velocity (how hard the
keyboard was played) of performance data.
COPY & PASTE TRANSPOSE (page 102)
Copy recording data and paste it to the Change the key of the performance data.
desired location.
ADVANCE/DELAY (page 103)
TRACK COPY (page 97) Speed up or delay the sound production of
Copy data of specific tracks. performance data.
SONG COPY (page 97)
Sequencer

Copy data of specific songs.

About the measure count
The measure count on the display corresponds to the time signature of the selected rhythm. However,
if rhythm data is stored in the RHYTHM part and that part is played back, the measure count on the dis-
play corresponds to the stored rhythm data. (Refer to page 90.)
• If you wish to use a time signature not available in the preset rhythms, use the COMPOSER to cre-
ate a new time signature. (Refer to page 106.)

75
QQTG0692

09_Part IV.fm 76 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分

Part IV Sequencer

Sequencer parts
The following summary explains what is stored in each SEQUENCER part.
Part name
Used for Recorded contents
[name on display]
RIGHT1 [RT1] Recording the perform- • Sound and volume settings
RIGHT2 [RT2] ance of each part • PART EXPRESSION
LEFT [LFT] (REALTIME/STEP) • Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
PART1 [P 1] on the MIXER display (Refer to page 150.)
–PART9 [P 9] • PITCH BEND wheel operation
PART11 [P 11] • MODULATION wheel operation (KN2600)
–PART16 [P16]
DRUMS [DRM] Recording the drums • Sound and volume settings
(PART 10) performance with the • PART EXPRESSION
DRUM KITS group • Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
sounds (REAL- on the MIXER display (Refer to page 150.)
TIME/STEP)
CONTROL [CTL] Recording changes in • Rhythm setting and selection changes
the panel button status • RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
(REALTIME/STEP) • REVERB on/off
• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
• MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER status
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
• PANEL MEMORY selection changes
• TRANSPOSE status
• TECHNI-CHORD status
• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting
• CONDUCTOR status
• PERFORMANCE PADS setting
• FADE IN/OUT operation
• TOTAL EXPRESSION
AUTO PLAY CHORD Recording chords for the • Chord progression
[APC] AUTO PLAY CHORD • AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
(REALTIME) • START/STOP on/off
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
CHORD [CHD] Recording chord • Chord progression
progression for the • FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
AUTO PLAY CHORD
(STEP)
RHYTHM [RHY] Settings related to • Rhythm settings and selection changes
rhythm (STEP) • RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
Sequencer

• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting

• You can use the TRACK ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish. (Refer to page 91.)

76
QQTG0692

Press the EASY REC button to turn it on. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song number in which to record (1 to 10). 5. 2. • Your recorded performance is played back automatically.09_Part IV. Press the OK button. rhythms. Playback 1. • If you press the NAMING button. press the EASY REC button to turn it off. (Refer to page 85. • Note that by executing EASY REC. You can bypass the set-up procedures of the full-scale sequencer and begin recording quickly and easily. the original data in the selected song number is erased. Sequencer FILL IN 1 SEQUENCER RESET 2. • The display changes to the REALTIME SEQUENCER PLAY EASY REC RECORD display. you can assign a name to your song. Press the START/STOP button. • Recording begins as soon as you start the rhythm or play the keyboard. • The PLAY button turns on. 4. When you have finished recording. press the SEQUENCER PLAY but- ton to turn it off. 6.fm 77 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Easy Record Suppose you are playing the Keyboard and you wish to record and play back your performance to hear how it sounds. 77 QQTG0692 . effects. • The display changes to the following. Set the desired sounds. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1) button. Play the keyboard. Recording procedure 1.) 3. etc. • When you are finished playing back your per- formance.

Select SEQUENCER. press • To record AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC) parts. 7. you are going to record.) RECORD is active. (The song selected for recording only when STEP number is shown on the display. Recording procedure 1. Use this mode to record your performance in up to 16 tracks and create your own orchestra or band. at the beginning of the song. 6. press the START/STOP button when beginning recording. on. your performance is recorded with the timing exactly as you played it on the keyboard. multiple parts can- the currently active settings. the corresponding button in the CON- • When you press the PANEL WRITE button. For the LOCAL ON/OFF during playback. you can use Sequencer the MIXER display to visually adjust the set- tings for each track. (Refer to page 91. • If you press the MIXER button. TRACK ASSIGN display to adjust the settings. for the • The display looks similar to the following. Use the buttons below the display to turn on the “REC” indication above the track numbers 2. to record a performance part. sounds. RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts. 09_Part IV.) • If you are recording GM2 song data. • While you are recording. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it • The display looks similar to the following. use the 5. parts you are going to record. • The LOCAL ON/OFF setting on the MIXER display is used to specify whether the part assigned to that track sounds when it is played on the keyboard during recording. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a • The track for the RHYTHM (RHY) part can be song number in which to record. • The display looks similar to the following. DUCTOR must also be on. the OK button. effects. Set the sounds. Select REALTIME RECORD. etc. For parts that are the PANEL WRITE display appears. • The display changes to the following. however. volumes. • The panel settings which are active at the beginning of recording are stored.fm 78 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Realtime Record With REALTIME RECORD. Press the corresponding balance buttons to display “PLAY” above the track number you wish to have played back. you can select two or more tracks to record at one time. you can play back tracks which are already recorded. To store not in the CONDUCTOR. Select RECORD & EDIT. select from the GM2 group in the SOUND EXPLORER. • For the RIGHT 1. 78 QQTG0692 . turn on the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON button. such as the not be recorded at one time. 4. 3. In this case.

ified after recording as beginning song data. store them in the control (CTL) part. back. blank recording continues even if you stop playing. Sequencer (Refer to page 84. turn off MEASURE= indicates the current measure. • If the metronome is on. tempo changes. not be recorded. or turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button. the rhythm start will to start the rhythm and begin recording. Note that. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other tracks. • Recording begins. press the REC STOP button on the display. recording. 3. MEMORY= indicates the remaining mem- press the MIXER button and follow the PANEL ory (%) available for recording. Use the following procedure to record one track • The tempo is shown on the display as q =. etc. Press the START/STOP button and begin • The metronome sound is not recorded. • The metronome selection alternates between 2. When multi-track recording is finished. (Refer to page 83. WRITE procedure. etc. • Tracks for which “PLAY” is shown are played 10.09_Part IV. the rhythm does not start. 9. effects. • If you turn on the “REC” for the CONTROL • You can also press the START/STOP button track and begin recording. after which recording automatically recording. 79 QQTG0692 . begins. display.) • If you wish to redo the recording. and press the REC STOP button at the end of the recording. • If you make a mistake in recording. Use the TEMPO/PROGRAM to adjust the  Multi-track recording recording tempo. you can correct a specific portion of your perfor- mance without having to redo the whole part. • When set to ON. them in the rhythm (RHY) part. Recording does not start until the two. TIME SIG. the PROGRAM MENUS button. press the REC STOP button and then record again. and you can record in time with this. When you have finished recording. Play the keyboard. as measure count is completed. while listening to the track or tracks already • If you wish to record the tempo setting and recorded. desired. as long as the ending command is not recorded. the ending command (END) is recorded.) 11. • When the PROGRAM MENUS button is turned off. and select the sounds and pressed. Follow the procedure to record the first track. To change the sounds and effects. Turn on the “REC” indication for the track you ON and OFF each time the button is wish to record next. 5. Turn the metronome on or off as desired with • The indication for the track just recorded the ON/OFF button at the upper right of the changes from “REC” to “PLAY”. • The SEQUENCER PLAY button turns on. the metronome volume set- ting display is momentarily shown. • The recording status is continuously updated on the display: 6.fm 79 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer 8. please set them again. or use the step record to store 1. a two-measure count 4. In this case.= indicates the current time sig- • If you wish to store part settings that you mod- nature. Press the REC STOP button at the end of the plays. when you press the START/STOP button.

• Cycle record can also be started from the REALTIME RECORD display whenever the CYCLE: ON indication is shown. press the CLEAR button. This button does not function during recording. Press the START/STOP button. • The measure in which the END command has been stored can also be specified. • The specified measures are repeated. START END 1 2 3 4 CYCLE END MEASURE: 4 5.fm 80 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer CYCLE RECORD This mode allows you to have specified record- ing measures continuously repeated. When you have finished recording. 3. specify 7. and “PLAY” for track numbers you the PROGRAM MENUS button. or turn off record. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the beginning measure number. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the ending measure number. press the “REC” for a track number you are going to REC STOP button on the display. • If the metronome is on. Play the keyboard. On the REALTIME RECORD display. 1. 6. 09_Part IV. Press the CYCLE: OFF button. 80 QQTG0692 . • If the CYCLE: ON button is pressed. • If you wish to erase all the performance data from the specified measures. 4. 2. • The display looks similar to the following. cycle recording of the specified measures begins after a two- measure count. press the EXIT button. Thus you can record measures by adding notes during any cycle. • To return to the REALTIME RECORD display. wish to have played back. it changes to OFF. during which time you can record by adding notes lit- Sequencer tle by little at the correct timing (over-dubbing).

use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song num. use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the measure SEQUENCER PLAY EASY REC number. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1) play used in the STEP RECORD and EDIT button. When you are finished playing back your per- are already recorded. 7. • You can select two or more tracks to play back at one time. Note that the tempo change is also canceled when you switch to another song or load a new song. press the SEQUENCER PLAY but- numbers can be selected for playback. from the specified measure. Press the START/STOP button. displays conforms to the time signature data • The SEQUENCER returns to the beginning of stored in the RHYTHM part. button. 3. while the song is stopped press the SEQUENCER RESET button. If you want to playback a song starting from a it on. To stop playback. After pressing the SONG button.09_Part IV. Only highlighted track formance. • When the tempo is changed. • If the START/STOP button is pressed again.fm 81 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Sequencer Play Play back your recorded performance. • To return to the original tempo. COUNT INTRO. • For information about LYRICS. • The adjusted tempo is canceled when you begin the recording procedure and the original tempo data will be recorded. If a rhythm progression has been recorded in the RHYTHM (RHY) part. even in song data in which tempo change data is stored. • You can press the MIXER button and modify the settings for each part. • Highlighted track numbers indicate tracks that 8. you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking. ton to turn it off. Press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn 5. 1. • The recorded performance is played back • The display looks similar to the following. Use the balance buttons below the display to playback will continue from the point it was show “PLAY” above the track numbers you interrupted. wish to have played back. the corresponding func- tion does not work. 6. Sequencer Adjusting the playback tempo Even with a song having recorded tempo data. the song and the beginning panel settings are recalled. • “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number. the MEASURE dis- 4. Accordingly. point other than the first measure. • When playback is begun from a measure in which an INTRO. 81 QQTG0692 . 2. FILL IN or ENDING is recorded. refer to page 123. all the tempo data of that song is automatically changed by the same ratio. press the START/STOP ber for playback. a single adjustment of the tempo produces a natural-sounding playback.

press the EXIT button. next to the file name indicates its order in the list. specify • The measure in which the END command has “PLAY” for track numbers you wish to have been stored can also be specified. • Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat playback of the medley. and MEDLEY button. played back. the files are dese- lected. M02 etc. 1. To stop cycle playback.fm 82 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer CYCLE PLAY You can have specified measures played back repeatedly. the SEQUENCER returns to measure 1. • You can use the buttons below the display to Sequencer select a song to add to the song list. specified in step 3. • Normally the rhythm pattern is not played back. • During playback stop. Press the START/STOP button. • Cycle playback of the specified measures begins. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display. • The display looks similar to the following. the 4. • You can delete a marked file from the medley 2. • During medley playback. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to SEQUENCER returns to the measure number specify the ending measure number. If the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed again. Press the CYCLE button. 09_Part IV. • If you press the CYCLE: ON button to turn it OFF. A M01. cycle playback is not possible. 1. if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1) button is pressed. press the • If ALL is pressed. 6. • Cycle playback can also be specified on the SEQUENCER PLAY display whenever the CYCLE: ON indication is shown. MEDLEY Recorded songs can be played back in a medley. all the files are selected. START END 1 2 3 4 2. song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD button. • To return to the SEQUENCER PLAY display. to specify the beginning measure number. ley. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display. 3. Specify the order of songs in the medley. CYCLE END MEASURE: 4 5. If ALL is pressed again. then press the ADD button to add it to the list. 82 QQTG0692 . Repeat these steps to create your own list of songs to have played back. press the START/ 3. you can use the SKIP button to skip to the next song. Press the START button. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons STOP button again. the songs are played back in order in a med- • The display looks similar to the following.

• Press the →← button to center the name.09_Part IV. use the SONG ∧ 3. 4. Press the OK button. These are the settings which are recalled when the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed. select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name • The display looks similar to the following. name. • The display looks similar to the following. TION buttons. • PANEL WRITE is automatically activated at the when you start to record. • Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor position. assignment. • Set the character input position with the POSI- 2. Panel Write You can change the panel status which is in effect at the beginning of the song.fm 83 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Naming Here is the way to assign a name to your recorded song. and ∨ buttons to select the song number. abc button. • “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. Sequencer 2. • Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC. On the SEQ MENU display. Use the panel buttons to change to the desired panel settings. Press the OK button. Then select PANEL WRITE. • For rhythm data. 83 QQTG0692 . Use the buttons below the display to assign a SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song. Press the NAMING button. 1. 1. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire name. the data in the RHYTHM part has priority. On the SEQ MENU display use the SONG 3. • Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.

right of the song name. songs you do not wish to preserve should be deleted. number. select rent song is shown as a percentage (%) to the SONG SELECT. • “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number. 4. Select the track which contains the portion you SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song want to correct. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the beginning measure of playback. 84 QQTG0692 . select a song. tracks which are being played back.) Punch Record If you make a playing error during REALTIME RECORD or would like to change the recording for some other reason. 1. Use the SONG SELECT ▲ and ▼ buttons to & EDIT.fm 84 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Song Select You can select a desired song from the list of recorded songs. On the SEQ MENU display. 09_Part IV. • The total amount of memory used for the cur- 2. On the RECORD & EDIT display. • If the NAMING button is pressed. • You cannot select a track in which no data is Sequencer stored. Then select RECORD & EDIT. select • On the display “REC” indicates tracks which PUNCH RECORD. • To optimize memory. are being recorded. and “PLAY” indicates • The display looks similar to the following. Press the START/STOP button to begin play- back of the specified track. • The display looks similar to the following. you can use the punch recording feature to correct a selected portion of the performance without having to redo the whole part. On the RECORD & EDIT display. 2. use the SONG 3. 5. the NAMING display appears. On the SEQ MENU display. Playing error Recording the performance Punch in Punch out Replay this portion Playback Recording mode 1. select RECORD 3. (Refer to page 93.

(Refer to page 172. sure. • The specified measure is recorded. Press the START/STOP button. Press the REC STOP button at the point you recording mode at the specified FIRST mea- want to stop recording. • Playback begins from the measure indicated • Recording begins as soon as the PUNCH IN by CURRENT MEASURE on the display. • The display changes to the PUNCH RECORD display. The mode • Punch recording stops immediately. Begin playing at this point. • Pertinent information. with the optional Foot Switch (sold sepa- rately). so that recording automati- cally begins and ends at the specified points. • You can also begin punch-in recording by • To discontinue punch recording in the middle. the • You can specify the punch-in/punch-out points recorded contents up to that point are erased. such as the FIRST • The REC indication changes to the PUNCH MEASURE. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the punch-out measure. Correct the performance.)  AUTO PUNCH RECORD You can also set the punch-in and punch-out points beforehand. press the CANCEL button. button is pressed. 1. 5. During playback. automatically changes back to the playback mode at the specified LAST measure. • The number of the LAST measure must be higher than the number of the FIRST mea- Sequencer sure. • The display looks similar to the following. Use the COUNT IN MEASURE ∧ and ∨ but- tons to specify the number of lead-in mea- sures you wish to have played back before the punch-in measure. playing the keyboard. On the PUNCH RECORD display. 7. In this case. press the PUNCH IN button 6. 3. • The mode changes automatically to the 7. Begin playing at this point.fm 85 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer 6. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the punch-in measure. 85 QQTG0692 .09_Part IV. • Set the metronome to on or off with the ON or OFF button. at the point you want to begin recording. is shown in the upper section of indication. 2. Press the EXIT button. 4. press the AUTO: OFF button. the display. • The PUNCH IN button switches to the REC STOP button.

display. (A 3 3.) 8. Instead of playing the keyboard directly as in the REALTIME RECORD mode. • Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter- • The display changes to the PART SELECT note (a thirty-second note). • When recording chords. Select from r3. 6. • This step is not necessary if you are recording 1. On the SEQ MENU display. w. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by • If you selected the track to which the CON. measure. x. if you select triplet-type notes for the note length (LENGTH) in step 6 below. 86 QQTG0692 . the display changes to the STEP RECORD: RHYTHM display. to the STEP RECORD: CHORD display. Use the balance buttons below the display to denotes a triplet-type note.) STAC (staccato): 50% • If you selected the track to which the CUTT (cutting): 25% RHYTHM part has been assigned. you can store multiple notes at one position. ) q+e 7. Recording procedure Record the keyboard performance and panel 4. Sequencer • If you selected the track to which the CHORD TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95% part has been assigned. NORM (normal): 80% (Refer to page 88. TROL part has been assigned. q3.) specify the track for the part you are going to • For note values other than these. input display similar to the following. e. On the RECORD & EDIT display. • When storing triplets. Use the CURSOR  and  buttons to move the cursor to the note position (dot) you are 2. r. w × 2 to 4. SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song number. h. the timing is automatically corrected. Use the right REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the actual length of the produced sound for the desired legato or staccato effect. the note value to be added to that which you • The display changes to the STEP RECORD specified with the left buttons. Then select RECORD & EDIT. 5. it may not be possible to match the timing exactly with the 1/32-note steps. use the SONG from measure 1 of a blank track. playing the keyboard. the display changes of the note length. select STEP going to store. use the cen- record (only one track can be selected at a ter REC NOTE LENGTH buttons to specify time). RECORD. Use the left REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the note value. However. Example: To record a dotted quarter-note ( q. the display • The dot on the display where the note is changes to the STEP RECORD: CONTROL stored changes to a ∗ mark. display. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the changes. you can take your time to input each single note. This is an especially effective method for storing complicated passages that are difficult to play or when the exact timing of a part is critical. 09_Part IV. (Refer to page 90. e3.fm 86 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Step Record STEP RECORD is simply a method of making a tune by storing the sounds note-by-note on the display. x3. q.

edited on a piano roll display. wheel operation. press the Control data PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off. TUNING (FINE TUNE). press the but- The name of the sound is displayed. Use the CURSOR buttons that this is the correct value and press the to move the cursor to the point ( ∗ ) you wish YES button to record the value or the NO to edit. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure value is indicated on the display. When you have finished recording. move the cursor to the error. interposed on the current display). • Performance (NOTE) data can be recorded or press the CTL button. the DRUMS part data. 1. and after displaying the data you 3. Sound data • To input data on another track. and there is also 2. Confirm you wish to modify. • The data stored at that point is shown on the display. Press YES button. Use the relevant 9. • When a wheel or dial is operated. 87 QQTG0692 . Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the numerical value of the setting. use the NOTE data (note pitch) and VEL data (how hard VALUE buttons to set the volume (0 to 127). position. • You can also correct data which was stored in the REALTIME RECORD mode. ERS: If you make a mistake. button to cancel it. wish to erase. press the ERS button. the cursor position. Performance data after pressing the BAL button. after specifying the note ferent data is displayed in order each time a LENGTH. specify the track ation. Use the CTL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the a specialized display for recording and editing Sequencer control data you wish to insert. On the STEP RECORD: MELODY display. 4. 10. Change the ton for the desired track and repeat the pro- sound as desired (the sound setting display is cedure from step 2.  Storing control data • Press the ERS button to erase the data which Various control data can be stored at the cursor is displayed. REST: • When multiple data is stored at one point. The name of the function is displayed. (Refer to page 94. KEY SHIFT (COARSE TUNE). BEND SENS. CURSOR button is pressed.fm 87 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer • Any panel setting changes—for example  Correcting the data changes in the sound selection. In the STEP RECORD mode. 1. 3. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to continue storing buttons to correct the data as desired. the input 2. notes.—are recorded at you wish to correct. Change the data as desired. the key was played) and LEN data (1 = 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]) are displayed. There are three types of data: BAL: To specify the volume at the cursor position. a different note in the chord is dis- as rests. When a chord is • Positions at which nothing is stored are read recorded. dif- To store a rest. etc. press the REST button.09_Part IV. Correct the data. played each time a CURSOR button is pressed. button oper.) • Select from PAN.

press the Reset key End key ( ). w 2. Then. Store the chords. h h. Correction keys  Move back one step. 09_Part IV. Dotted half-note sion has been stored. <Measure 1. to the next unre- corded position. & Press to begin storing from the begin- ning. measure 2> 1. 3. • The display changes to the PART SELECT Sequencer display. Using the balance buttons below the display. On the SEQ MENU display.fm 88 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Store a chord progression Store the chord progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD in the track for the CHORD part. w w h h h h 4. h Half-note q. On the RECORD & EDIT display. w  Move forward one step. 88 QQTG0692 . when the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used during playback. stored changes to a ∗ mark and the cursor automatically moves forward. the chords change automatically. The chord name is shown on the display. SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song number. in accordance with the specified note value. select STEP RECORD. Note value keys End key w Whole note Press after the whole chord progres- h. Then select RECORD & EDIT. e Eighth-note • To erase all the data from the current track. even if you do not specify the chords with your left hand. use the SONG While playing a C chord with your left hand. Dotted quarter-note DELETE key q Quarter-note DELETE Press to erase data.  Example of storing a chord progression • STEP REC: CHORD can also be enabled by pressing on the EASY RECORD button con- Measure 1 2 3 4 tinuously a few seconds. Repeat key Press to end the chord-storing proce- dure and to specify automatic repeat playback of the stored progression. This will display the C C Am F D7 G7 CHORD screen. • The display changes to the STEP RECORD: • The dot on the display where the chord is CHORD input display similar to the following. DELETE & e q q. • The chord length is specified with the CHORD STEP RECORD keys on the keyboard. while pressing the DELETE key. select the track to which the CHORD (CHD/ • A “beep” tone indicates that the chord has APC) part has been assigned. press the w key one time with your right hand. been successfully stored.

you how to finger a specified chord.....10-beat rest (1) While playing a D7 chord. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure you wish to modify. out specifying a chord.1-beat rest (quarter rest) ‰ .. For DELETE key is pressed.. Each time the chord progression stops at this point... which shows press the NO button.. • The lengths of rests are indicated by the (2) While playing an F chord.. • To go to the end of the chord progression. <one finger> mode). units of Œ × 1. enter an of the End key ( ). gression... erase the data and then store a new chord. chords such as the CLR button. time.) position..09_Part IV.) is displayed. The ‰ rest is erased last.. time.) 89 QQTG0692 .1-1/2-beat rest (dotted quarter rest) <Measure 4> Œ × 10. (Refer to page 55. RECORD: CHORD display.. key to erase the data which is displayed... chord. the chords of the automatic accompani. • You can press the INTRO & ENDING button 3.. • During playback. Use the  and  Correc- tion keys to move the cursor to the point (∗) you wish to edit... you can press the DELETE key to • Store a rest by pressing a note value key with. The name of the stored function (INTRO. press the h key one respective rest value × its multiplier.... the new data is 5... Follow the procedure to select the STEP one time. playback of the recorded • Rests can also be erased.. FILL. At the end of the chord progression.... press the inserted at this point. is avail- able. press the h key one time. press the (2) While playing a G7 chord. • To specify chords by the <one finger> mode.1/2-beat rest (eighth rest) Œ × 1 + ‰ .. and then press the YES button “C on G” can also be specified (except in the on the confirmation display... • If you wish to cancel the clear procedure.. press • If the ON BASS button is on. h 2..fm 89 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer <Measure 3>  Correct the recorded chord progression (1) While playing an Am chord. Correct the chord data. while pressing the Reset key ( & ).. the rest is erased in automatic repeat playback of the chord pro... • When you play back the track for the CHORD Control data part. To erase all data from the current track. END command. or a FILL IN button on the panel to store the desired pattern at the cursor position. • If you do not erase the displayed data before entering new chord data. You can press the DELETE Sequencer chord progression... Example: h Œ . ment change in accordance with the stored etc. • The CHORD FINDER feature. merely shifted by the note value of the new • The Keyboard exits the recording mode. press the h key 1.. press the Repeat key ( ) instead • If you wish to cancel the REPEAT. press the h key one  key. (An Chord data INTRO or COUNT INTRO can be stored only When the chord name is displayed at the cursor at the beginning. select the BASIC mode before entering the  TRACK CLEAR STEP RECORD mode.. and the displayed data is End key ( ).

ferent time signature. (The ∗ is highlighted. enter an END command. Then select RECORD & EDIT. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to go to the tracks. • If data has already been recorded in other 4. and then press the YES button Changes in the rhythm selection on the confirmation display. 3. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure you wish to modify. COUNT INTRO. you cannot select a rhythm with a dif- measure you wish to record. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue storing the rhythm progression. use the SONG ∧ 7. press the NO button. during playback the recorded 2. Store the rhythm data. FILL IN. • If the REP button is pressed instead of the END button. press START/STOP the CLR button. fill-ins and the ending. • If you wish to cancel the REPEAT. the time signature of all subsequent measures will also change. as well as the intro. Using the balance buttons below the display. ENDING Tempo changes • Be sure to store the START/STOP data in the measure in which the rhythm starts or stops.fm 90 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Store a rhythm progression Changes in the rhythm selection and tempo. or press the NO button to cancel the new tempo value. • If you are storing a COUNT INTRO or INTRO.) • The display changes to the STEP RECORD: RHYTHM input display similar to the following. 1. Press the YES button to store the specified tempo. RECORD: RHYTHM display. 5. 2. After specifying the desired tempo. Sequencer • If the tempo is changed. • The Keyboard exits the recording mode. store this data before the START/STOP data.  Correct the recorded rhythm progression 1. • Press the ERS button to erase data at the cur- sor position. 6. INTRO. select STEP rhythm progression is repeated. RECORD. the display changes to the confirmation display. press and ∨ buttons to select the song number. At the end of the rhythm progression.  TRACK CLEAR • Data which can be stored: To erase all data from the current track. • If you wish to cancel the clear procedure. Follow the procedure to select the STEP 3. • If you select a rhythm with a different time sig- nature. 90 QQTG0692 . On the RECORD & EDIT display. can be stored by measures with the step recording method. On the SEQ MENU display. select the track to which the RHYTHM (RHY) part has been assigned. • The display changes to the PART SELECT display. RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4. the END button. Correct the rhythm data. 09_Part IV.

CHORD and RHYTHM parts cannot be assigned to more than one GM MULTI RECORDING: track. select the part for the specified track. Press the OK button. 1. to specify whether or not the sound of the part assigned to this track is gen. Use the TRACK ASSIGN ∧ and ∨ buttons to effective for all the songs. erated. Sequencer • You can use the MIDI OUT ON and OFF but- tons to specify whether or not the data of the part assigned to this track is sent as MIDI data. Then select RECORD & EDIT. On the SEQ MENU display. point. to OFF through this procedure. even if MIDI equipment is connected. Because no sound is generated for • “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and this instrument’s parts assigned to tracks set the selected track assign mode is enabled. source through the MIDI connectors. CHORD or RHYTHM part is assigned. TECHNICS MULTI RECORDING: • Either the CHORD part or APC part can be The optimum track assignment for multiplex assigned to a track.fm 91 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Track Assign Each SEQUENCER part is already assigned to a track number. 1. The optimum track assignment for creating • You can use the ON and OFF buttons for GENERAL MIDI data. number. the track assignment is 4. assignment will be effective. 4. 2. use the SONG  TRACK ASSIGN PRESETS SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song A preset track assignment can be selected. • The CONTROL. CHORD or RHYTHM part. APC. 5. APC. TRACK ASSIGN. the INITIAL: track assign procedure is completed at this Factory-preset settings. • When a part other than the CONTROL. When set to OFF. • The display looks similar to the following. • The display looks similar to the following.09_Part IV. 91 QQTG0692 . select PRESET button. use this setting • You can confirm the track assignment settings to generate sound from an external sound on the TRACK ASSIGN display. APC. but not both. • If ALL is selected. recording. 3. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the song number for which the preset track track. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the 3. LOCAL CONT. press the OK but- ton. On the TRACK ASSIGN display. press the 2. the data is not sent. you can use the TRACK ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish. On the RECORD & EDIT display. Whenassigning the CONTROL. However. Select the track assign mode.

• Select from q.fm 92 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Quantize The QUANTIZE function can correct the timing of your performance after it has been recorded. it will automatically be corrected to the specified quantize level. 5. On the RECORD & EDIT display. 1. the amount of quantize (%). Timing of actual • The +100% setting and the –100% setting are performance the same. Use the WINDOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the range (%) affected by the quantize setting. at 50%. r3. For example. Quantized Example: When VALUE is set to q performance 3. –50% –30% 4. e3. data far from the just point is corrected. When set to 2. if set to Rhythm as written –30% the quantize function affects data far in the score from the just point. For example. (A 3 denotes a triplet-type note. • You cannot select the track for the CONTROL. By this setting. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the quantize level. Press the OK button. • 100% is a convenient setting. x3. select 100%. the data is quan- tized to a point that is half that of the just level. +100% is usually a convenient setting. x. r. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to –100% specify the start point (measure number). or press Sequencer the NO button to cancel the function. all the tracks are quantized. 9. If the rhythm is slightly out of sync or inexact. data close to the just point is corrected. • The confirmation display appears. the performance data is quantized QUANTIZE. (“just”). Use the STRENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to select & EDIT. 8. On the SEQ MENU display. e. you can attain an effect that is very slightly off-beat from the rhythm. 6.) 92 QQTG0692 . exactly to the level specified for the VALUE • The display looks similar to the following. and if set to +30% the quantize function affects data close to the just point. and at a – setting. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify e 100% 50% just 50% 100% the track number. +30% • If ALL is selected. +100% +50% RHYTHM or CHORD part. at a + setting. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec. • With the increment set to 100 for the VALUE. select RECORD 7. 09_Part IV. Press the ify the end point (measure number). YES button to execute the function.

/ALL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the song to erase. Track Clear Erase the contents of a specific track. the specified • The display looks similar to the following. the specified songs are erased. On the RECORD & EDIT display. TRACK CLEAR. CLEAR. select the NO button to cancel the function. On the SEQ MENU display. • If ALL is selected. all the songs recorded in the SEQUENCER will be erased. Use the SONG No. • A “CLR” mark is shown for the selected tracks. Press the OK button. On tne SEQ MENU display. or press 2. • If the YES button is pressed. Press the OK button. & EDIT. 1. • The confirmation display appears.09_Part IV. appears on the display. or press 2. • If the YES button is pressed. selct SONG the NO button to cancel the function. Press the YES button to execute the function. select RECORD 4. Sequencer 3. Use the balance buttons to select the track or tracks you wish to clear. • The data size (KB) and the total amount of SEQUENCER memory or current song mem- ory used is shown as a percentage (%) to the right of the song name. select RECORD 4. • The confirmation display appears. 1. 93 QQTG0692 .fm 93 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Song Clear Erase the recorded contents of all tracks. “COMPLETED!” • The display looks similar to the following. 3. tracks are erased. Press the YES button to execute the function. On the RECORD & EDIT display. & EDIT.

select a track. Use the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the highlighted. • The display looks similar to the following. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to continue editing. played).48 indicates a point in measure hard the key is played).2. select cursor. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the You can also store note data on this display. • Examples of note lengths ( q = 96) 91: tenuto (95%) • You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to 76: normal (80%) change the increment of cursor movement. the note number. use the STEP RECORD display. the cursor will stop. measure you wish to edit. Data selected for editing is 2.  Inserting note data 4. 4. Specify the point where the new note data will 5. This differs from the normal STEP RECORD edit procedure. To correct or record other types of data. On the SEQ MENU display. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more note data. • Recorded performance (NOTE) data is shown as horizontal bars. (Refer to page 86. the selected NOTE data is erased. On the RECORD & EDIT display. point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]). Use the CURSOR  and  buttons to move be stored. select RECORD 6. • Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the 3. • is shown at the point where the END com- mand is stored. the cursor ( ▼ ) to the point you wish to edit. if 24: cutting (25%) NOTE data is present between increments. beat 2. 7. the NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change NOTE EDIT. pitch (NOTE NUMBER) and velocity (how • Example: 10.fm 94 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Note Edit You can edit performance (NOTE) data on a piano roll display. and the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to • The CHORD. However. note [ q ]). Play a key on the keyboard to specify the note value. lighted horizontal bar). Edit the data. RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks change the note length (1 = 1/96 of a quarter cannot be selected. and is a convenient way to check the data for each note. note length. 94 QQTG0692 . • Data other than NOTE data cannot be corrected or recorded. 48: staccato (50%) The resolution can be set at q /96. On the PART SELECT display. Sequencer 10. 09_Part IV. the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the velocity (how hard the keys are 3. Select the data to edit (it changes to a high- & EDIT. • Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the 2. • Use the GRAPH ▲ and ▼ buttons to view a higher or lower section of the keyboard (in one-octave steps). 1.) 1. • If the ERS button is pressed.

1. playback they should be selected beforehand on the changes to that of the recording track only.fm 95 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer  CYCLE PLAY You can aurally check the data you are editing by 4. On the NOTE EDIT display. • Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the value. • The display looks similar to the following. 2. Use the CURSOR  and  buttons to move the cursor (▼) to the point you wish to edit. the SEQUENCER returns to the measure number specified in step 2. 6. Drum Edit The DRUMS part can be edited on a specialized display. However. • Recorded performance data is shown as verti- cal bars. • If the SOLO button is turned on. press the START/ button. select RECORD 4. accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the • Cycle playback of the specified measures NOTE EDIT display. (Continued on the next page) 95 QQTG0692 . 3. Press the START/STOP button. This differs from the normal STEP RECORD edit procedure. track for the DRUMS part. select is its MIDI NOTE NUMBER in the Technics DRUM EDIT.) SEQUENCER PLAY display are played back. if NOTE data is present between increments. The resolution can be set at q /96. Sequencer • The display looks similar to the following. If the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed again. On the RECORD & EDIT display. On the PART SELECT display. arrangement. Data selected for editing is high- lighted. • During playback stop. the SEQUENCER returns to measure 1. • If sounds other than percussion instrument 3. STOP button again. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the cannot be selected. and is a convenient way to check the data for each note. • The number to the left of the instrument name 2. press the PLAY 5. • You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the increment of cursor movement. percussion instrument you wish to edit. RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks 5. (Refer to page is turned off.09_Part IV. On the SEQ MENU display. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the last playback measure. all the tracks specified on the 81. they are not displayed. measure you wish to edit. if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1) button is pressed. If it SEQUENCER PLAY display. To stop cycle playback. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the beginning playback measure. the cursor will stop. select the sounds are assigned. 1. Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the & EDIT. • The CHORD. • If you wish other tracks to be played back. begins.

be stored. point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a You can also store DRUMS data on this display. Edit the data.fm 96 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Example: 10. regardless of which NOTE data is erased. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more DRUMS data. Press the ENTER button to store the data. Select the data to edit (it changes to a long 2. Specify the point where the new note data will mand is stored. they should be selected beforehand on the SEQUENCER PLAY display. the SND ∧ and ∨ buttons to change 3. • is shown at the point where the END com. quarter note [ q ]). • Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the cursor. the percussion instrument sound. the selected specified on the display. velocity (how hard the key is played). • The procedure is the same as for NOTE EDIT. and the VEL • Instead of the ENTER button. beat 2. Use the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the bar). In this case.  CYCLE PLAY You can aurally check the data you are editing by accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the DRUM EDIT display.2. 09_Part IV.) Sequencer 96 QQTG0692 . you can store ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the velocity (how data (including velocity data) by playing the hard the keys are played). Repeat steps 4 to 7 to continue editing. 4. 1. 7. key is played. the instrument is that • If the ERS button is pressed. 8. (Refer to page 81.48 indicates a point in measure  Inserting DRUMS data 10. • If you wish other tracks to be played back. keyboard.

09_Part IV. you can use side). SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the number of the song. On the COPY & PASTE display. use the SONG ∧ and ∨ but- tons to select the song number to copy to. Note that in some cases. 3. or press the NO button to cancel the function. select a func. use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song number you wish to Sequencer copy from. the TEMPO/PROGRAM for the editing func- tion. • If ALL is selected. On the TO side. • The confirmation display appears. 2. 3. Press the YES button to execute the function. if the indicator 2. On the FROM side. cific song memory. 1. RHYTHM and CHORD part data in the desti- nation tracks may be lost. ify a track. On the SEQ MENU display. Perform the editing procedures. tion. Press the OK button. Specify the track you wish to copy to (TO for the TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit. • On the FROM side. Press the SONG COPY YES button to execute the function. 97 QQTG0692 . Copy all the recording data of a song to a spe- • The track assignment settings are also copied. use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons and TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- 2. 1. • The confirmation display appears. (See below. Press the OK button. all the tracks of the speci- fied song number will be copied. the CONTROL. Then select COPY & PASTE.fm 97 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Copy and paste the recorded data You can copy and paste specific portions of the recorded data. Select the function TRACK COPY Copy the recorded data from specific tracks of a 1. • The display looks similar to the following. Specify the track you wish to copy from. or press the NO button to cancel the function.) • During the editing procedure. 3. use the SONG song.

3. parts are merged in the destination track. or press the NO button to cancel the function. REPEAT: Specify the number of times the selected measures are to be repeated. • On the FROM side. replaces the current measure contents. assigned. TRACK: • You cannot select the track to which the CON. START MEAS: Sequencer Specify the start point to copy the selected measures to. a third track (destination track). 1. Specify where you wish to copy the selected measures to. use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ the corresponding buttons. • The confirmation display appears. Any data fol- lowing the END command is not copied.fm 98 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer TRACK MERGE MEASURE COPY Merge the recorded contents of two tracks Copy recorded data of specified measures to a (source tracks) and store the merged contents in specified point. 3. • On the destination track. Select the two source tracks (FROM). track. or press TRACK: the NO button to cancel the function. 1. Specify the track number you wish to copy TROL. Select the destination track (TO). 98 QQTG0692 . MERGE display) is different from the part • If ALL is selected. Press the corresponding buttons. RHYTHM or CHORD part has been the measures from. it is also copied. the data is erased from the two source tracks. Press the YES button to execute the function. specify the settings with • On the FROM side. • Measures in a track for the CONTROL. • On the TO side. when the are copied to all tracks at the same time. the new data • When the TRACK MERGE function is exe. RHYTHM or CHORD part can be copied only to the same track. the specified measures assigned to the right source track. • Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to the right of the display to specify the track number. Specify the last measure to copy. Specify the track number you wish to copy to. the FIRST MEAS: new track is assigned the same part as the left Specify the first measure to copy. LAST MEAS: 2. Press the OK button. • Note that if the END command is included in the source data. • You cannot select the track for the • If the part assigned to the left source track RHYTHM part or CHORD part in which a (“left” meaning its position on the TRACK repeat command has been stored. Specify the measures you wish to copy from the source track (FROM). 2. buttons to select the two source tracks. YES button to execute the function. 09_Part IV. Press the OK button. cuted. specify the settings with the • The confirmation display appears.

Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec. 2. or press 4. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to 3. CONTROL: Only control data (volume. ify the end point (measure number). or press the NO button to cancel the function. RHYTHM track in which the repeat function • This function does not work for the RHYTHM has been stored. 4. deleted from all the tracks at one time. specify the first measure to delete. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify • This function does not work for the CHORD or the track number. 3. ALL: All data is erased. Press the OK button.09_Part IV. the specified measures are mand has been stored. Press the YES button to execute the function. Sequencer 5. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the start point (measure number). decreases by the number of deleted mea- • Note that only the contents of the measures sures. Press the YES button to execute the function. specify the last measure to delete. 1. the length of the performance remains the same. not the measures themselves. 1. • If ALL is selected.fm 99 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer MEASURE ERASE MEASURE DELETE Erase the recorded contents of specific mea. Delete specified measures from a track. • The confirmation display appears. Press the OK button. • The confirmation display appears. Use the ERASE DATA ∧ and ∨ buttons to the NO button to cancel the function. part or CHORD part in which a repeat com. to time. are erased. You can also specify which type of data is • The length of the performance accordingly to be erased. • If ALL is selected. NOTE: Only note data is erased. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the track from which measures are to be deleted. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons. 99 QQTG0692 . sures. specify the type of data to be erased. data is erased from the specified measures of all the tracks at one 2. effect and other panel settings as well as selection changes) is erased.

allowing you to play back song increases by the number of inserted mea. same length of time as playback. • If ALL is selected. specify the settings with track you wish to convert. Press the YES button to execute the function. data created using this instrument’s automatic sures. a check mark (√) indi- the measures from. Use the APC/PAD ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the parts you wish to convert. REPEAT: Specify the number of times the selected measures are to be repeated. the TRACK: conversion begins. FIRST MEASURE: • Parts that are set to OFF will not be converted. LAST MEASURE: • Note that after the conversion. Any data following the END command is not inserted. continue. Specify the first measure to copy. • The confirmation display appears. • This function does not work for the CHORD • Tracks in which RHYTHM. RHYTHM or • If you wish to discontinue the conversion pro- CONTROL track can only be inserted in the cess midway. the measures are inserted in all tracks at the same time. same track. or press the NO button to cancel the function. 3. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the • On the FROM side. • Note that if the END command is included in the source data. accompaniment and/or PERFORMANCE PADS on an external sequencer or sound generator. or • On the TO side. 100 QQTG0692 . START MEASURE: Sequencer Specify the start point to insert the selected measures. • After the EXECUTE button is pressed. Specify the measures you wish to copy from the source track. 1. specify the settings with the press the CANCEL button is you wish to dis- corresponding buttons. the Specify the last measure to copy. Press the CONVERT button. 3. 09_Part IV. it is also inserted. cates a track in which data is stored. CONTROL. Specify the track number you wish to copy • In the DATA column. This function converts data to Standard MIDI File • The length of the performance accordingly (SMF) format. APC or RHYTHM track in which the repeat func. Press EXE- measures. selected (− − − is shown). and CHORD parts are stored cannot be tion has been stored. save this data beforehand. • Measures from the CHORD. 2. 1. press the ABORT button.fm 100 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer MEASURE INSERT APC TO SMF CONVERT Insert specified measures at a specified point. if neces- sary. Press the OK button. Specify where you wish to insert the selected • A confirmation display appears. the corresponding buttons. APC/CHORD part data is cleared. the part name currently TRACK: assigned is shown. • In the PART column. Conversion takes the Specify the track number. 2. CUTE to continue with the conversion.

fm 101 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer Changing the note position etc.09_Part IV. 3. all tracks will be edited. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the track you wish to edit. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to • During the editing procedure. Perform the editing procedures. 101 QQTG0692 . • The confirmation display appears. (See below. RHYTHM or CHORD part. 6. 5. 1. • If ALL is selected. • You cannot select the track for the CONTROL. and ∨ buttons to select the number of the song. On the SEQ MENU display. Select the function NOTE CHANGE 1. select a func. On the RANGE EDIT display. 4. • The number next to the note name is its note number. Press the OK button. of the recorded data You can change the note pitch and position etc. the TEMPO/PROGRAM for the editing func- tion. • The display looks similar to the following. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the end point (measure number) of the note change. of recorded data. use the SONG ∧ Change of pitch of specified notes.) 2. Press the Sequencer YES button to execute the function. 2. Use the TARGET NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch of the note you wish to change. Use the CHANGE TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch you wish to change to. you can use the note change. if the indicator specify the start point (measure number) of for the TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit. Then select RANGE EDIT. 3. tion. or press the NO button to cancel the function.

Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the track you wish to edit. RHYTHM or CHORD part. YES button to execute the function. • You cannot select the track for the CONTROL. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the 1. Sequencer 102 QQTG0692 . • The confirmation display appears.fm 102 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer VELOCITY CHANGE TRANSPOSE Modify the recorded velocity in specific mea. Change of key of specific measures of specific sures of specific tracks. 09_Part IV. specify the change in pitch. transpose. • If ALL is selected. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the start point (measure number) of specify the start point (measure number) of the velocity change. tracks. 1. all tracks will be edited. 3. • The value you select will be added to or • Increments are in semitones. 2. 3. 4. Press the the NO button to cancel the function. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to 2. or press the NO button to cancel the function. track you wish to edit. • You cannot select the track for the CONTROL. the transpose. Press the 5. Press the OK button. A – value lowers the pitch. • If ALL is selected. one octave. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify 4. and a + value raises it. Press the OK button. 5. YES button to execute the function. A value of 12 is deleted from the current velocity. all tracks will be edited. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the end point (measure number) of the ify the end point (measure number) of the velocity change. or press • The confirmation display appears. RHYTHM or CHORD part. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to the change in velocity.

Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the start point (measure number) of the change.09_Part IV. • You cannot select the track for the CONTROL. ified performance data. 5. When this occurs use the TEMPO ADJUST feature to compensate for this timing discrepancy (–127 to +127). • If ALL is selected. 1. Press the 1. • A + value causes the notes to sound later. Use the ADVANCE/DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons to accelerate or delay the timing of the sound production (–96 to +96). 103 QQTG0692 . Use the PLAYLIST NUMBER ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the number you wish to synchronize from the PLAYLIST. 2. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the end point (measure number) of the Speed up or delay the sound production of spec- change.) <Note> When creating SEQUENCER data that is syn- chronized with SD AUDIO data. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the YES button to execute the function. and a – value causes the notes to sound earlier. all tracks will be edited. press the SD AUDIO SYNCHRO button. 4. Sequencer 3. 2. SD Audio Synchro (KN2600) The sound data on the SD card in the SD slot can be synchronized with SEQUENCER playback. Play back the SEQUENCER song. On the SEQ MENU display.fm 103 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分 Part IV Sequencer ADVANCE/DELAY 3. Press the OK button. the NO button to cancel the function. • The confirmation display appears. (Refer to page 81. or press track you wish to edit. the environment in which the SD AUDIO data was created may result in data that is slightly out of sync with the SEQUENCER. RHYTHM or CHORD part.

C). 䡲 MEMORY Because the contents of the MEMORY are erased after the power is turned off. 2. 2.000. • A Maj (major) and Min (minor) pattern is avail- able for each of the INTRO and ENDING 1 and 2. • When “Memory full!” appears on the display no more data can be stored in the COM- POSER. FILL IN 1.) Composer 104 QQTG0692 . FILL 1 and FILL 2. VARIATION 1 to 4. 10_Part V. 140. BASS and ACCOMP1–5 parts. you should save the data on disks/SD cards if you wish to keep it. • Each VARIATION is made of a PATTERN. INTRO VARI 1 VARI 2 VARI 3 VARI 4 ENDING 1 Maj PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN 1 Maj 1 Min FILL IN 1 FILL IN 1 FILL IN 1 FILL IN 1 1 Min 2 Maj FILL IN 2 FILL IN 2 FILL IN 2 FILL IN 2 2 Maj 2 Min 2 Min Memory capacity Expressed in terms of notes. A pattern is comprised of 8 parts: DRUMS 1. B. Rhythm components which can be stored Different INTRO 1. The remaining mem- ory available for recording is shown on the recording display as a percentage (%). 2 patterns can be created for each MEMORY (A. (Refer to pages 125. These parts would form the backing of a song. the total number of notes which can be stored in all the COMPOSER memories is about 13.fm 104 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer Outline of the Composer The COMPOSER enables you to create your own accompaniment patterns.

134. • The display looks similar to the following. selected for SINGLE LOAD.) Three ways to record in the COMPOSER There are three ways to create and record a rhythm. Select COMPOSER. This procedure Create a rhythm pattern with a simplified is the same as when COMPOSER is procedure.10_Part V. Copy a rhythm pattern into a memory. LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER Recall the desired COMPOSER data from EASY COMPOSER (page 106) data saved on a disk/card. then store it as a new rhythm. 䡲 Simple recording method (page 106) 䡲 Pattern Copy (page 115) Use EASY COMPOSER to quickly create a Copy a preset rhythm or SEQUENCER data to a unique rhythm just by selecting a pattern for COMPOSER memory. RECORDING MEMORY-B SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY (page 116) Create a memory in the MEMORY B bank.fm 105 ページ 2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時4分 Part V Composer COMPOSER menu 1. and each part. (Refer to pages 121. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it on. Summary of the COMPOSER menu items RECORDING MEMORY-A PATTERN COPY (page 115) Create a memory in the MEMORY A bank. edit it as you like. • You can use either realtime recording or step record for any part of the recording. RECORDING MEMORY-C Create a memory in the MEMORY C bank. Copy recorded data in the SEQUENCER to the COMPOSER. 䡲 Create a completely new rhythm (page 106) Compose all the parts of a completely new Composer rhythm from scratch. • The display looks similar to the following. 105 QQTG0692 . 2.

rent contents of the MEMORY (A/B/C) are erased (a confirmation display appears). B. refer to page 111. C-vari 1 to 4. • For playback. Use the MEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the 7. Create a completely new rhythm Clear the memories and compose a completely new rhythm from scratch. 1. B-vari 1 to 4 and • If you are not satisfied with the rhythm pattern. • The rhythm pattern is played back. • A part which is set to OFF does not sound. press the EDIT button. The display changes to the recording display. to each of which a style and variation is assigned. Press the SET button. • The display looks similar to the following. all the cur- • The display looks similar to the following. • In the EASY COMPOSER.) pattern is divided into 9 parts. 10_Part V. MEMORY A. On the COMPOSER MENU display. Composer 106 QQTG0692 . • If the MEM CLR button is pressed. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the your rhythm pattern. Prepare to record 1. part. • You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to the MEMORY. • The number of variations differs depending on the selected style. the new rhythm (Refer to page 108. Use the STYLE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a style. Note that the “BsDrum&Snare” part cannot be set to OFF. or C). variation number. 6. • Select from A-vari 1 to 4. 4. memory in which to record your rhythm. select 5. repeat steps 3 to 7. • If you wish to correct the sounds or phrases in 3. select a 2.fm 106 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer Simple recording method With EASY COMPOSER you can easily create a unique rhythm pattern by selecting a different style for each part of the rhythm. 2. • You can also use this method when copying a pattern from a preset rhythm or the SEQUENCER. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to select styles for the other parts. On the COMPOSER MENU display. Use the buttons below the display to select the memory in which to record (RECORDING pattern you want to create. Use the VARI ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the EASY COMPOSER.

8. 3. • The display looks similar to the following. Press the MEASURE SETTING button. If the recorded Use the CHORD ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the performance is played in a key or chord different chord type (Maj/Min). Press the YES button. 3. • All the data for the selected pattern is erased. press the VARI button and select a number. 7. press the EXIT button. Composer 107 QQTG0692 . • To assign a name to each VARIATION. Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the key. 6. Press the CLEAR THE ENTIRE PATTERN patterns are changed. from this setting.fm 107 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer 5. When you have finished making the settings. recorded pattern to be played. Use the TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the meter of the pattern (1/4 to 8/4).10_Part V. press the OK button. • The display looks similar to the following. Press the EXIT button. Use the MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the number of measures in your new rhythm pattern (1 to 16). • The display looks similar to the following. 1. 10. 9. Press the OK button. the automatic accompaniment will not be able to distinguish the correct chord. KEY SETTING Set the key and chord in which you wish the 2. On the RECORD MEMORY display. tings change at the same time. On the RECORDING display press the KEY SETTING button. the Maj and Min set- button. • When the settings for the MEASURE and TIME SIGNATURE of the INTRO or ENDING 4.

QUANTIZE: Smooth out any unevenness in the timing of your performance. (Refer to page 110. (The quantize level is played notes are added to those already shown on the display as QUANTIZE=. MODULATION (KN2600) (except for the DRUMS part) effects are also recorded. press this but- tempo which is easiest for you to play. 4. Data is erased one note or one percussion • The sounds marked with # represent special instrument (DRUMS part) sound at a time. (These settings are not AC1–5: ACCOMP 1–5 recorded. You can make detailed settings for each part. select sounds from groups other than the DIGITAL NOTE CLR: DRAWBAR sound groups. 108 QQTG0692 . so record at the • To turn off the SOLO function. rently being recorded.) DR1. 䡲 Button functions play. and press the key- other sounds may result in an unnatural. board key that corresponds to the note or per- ward sound expression.) recorded. • For the ACCOMP and BASS parts. • PITCH BEND. play back the rhythm pattern. • Before recording. 3. (Refer to page 111. selected part. 10_Part V. Record the part. • A MUTE mark is shown for the other parts on • The tempo can be freely adjusted when you the display.) STEP RECORD: Change to the STEP RECORD mode. Select the sound. PART CLR: • For the DRUMS part. In the START RECORDING area on the dis. cussion instrument (DRUMS part) sound you wish to erase. ALL ERAS: The performance recorded in the selected part is erased for as long as this button is pressed. during which time any newly desired quantize level. ton again. guitar performances and changing them to • Hold and press this button. Adjust the volume of each part on the PART BAS: BASS BALANCE display. 1. 2 • The metronome sound starts and the display PART SETTING: looks similar to the following. • The tempo is shown on the display as q =. awk.) SOLO: Mute all parts except the part which is cur- 2. • The SUSTAIN ON/OFF is also stored (except for the DRUMS part). Adjust the tempo. The current measure number is shown on the display as “MEASURE=”. Follow the KEY SETTING procedure if you wish to record the performance in a different scale. • The specified number of measures are repeat. select the rhythm part you want to record PART BALANCE: first. 2: DRUMS 1.fm 108 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer Recording procedure • Record the performance in C major for correct chord progressions during playback. only sounds from the Erase all recorded contents of the currently DRUM KITS sound group can be selected. select the note value for the Composer edly played back.

Press the EXIT button. CHANGE: The change is enabled. played notes which are not dis- played are changed to notes which are dis- played. Use the buttons below the display to switch to a different recording part. Chord Modify Change For data that has already been recorded. DRUMS): Use the GROUP and TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the type of pattern progression. 5. ENDING. • This setting is for the sound that is going to be recorded from this time. 5. On the RECORDING display. When you have finished recording the rhythm. 6. 6. and proceed to record each part in turn. 109 QQTG0692 . press the OK button. Use the GROUP and MODIFY TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the corresponding progres- sion type. • The display looks similar to the following.10_Part V. When you have finished making the settings Composer for each part.fm 109 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer KEY IN CHORD MODIFY <PAGE 2/2> (except for INTRO. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the part you wish to set. 1. 2. press the CHORD MODIFY CHANGE button. • This function cannot be used for the INTRO and ENDING patterns. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or disable the function. • If a progression type for which the note name is displayed (in C key) was selected for the chord group. 4. 3. turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button. KEEP: No change. you can select the type of pattern progression for the bass and accomp parts.

10_Part V.fm 110 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分

Part V Composer

Part Setting
You can make detailed settings for each part.

1. On the REALTIME RECORDING display, PAN:
press the PART SETTING button. Adjust the stereo balance of each part (LEFT
• The settings comprise 3 pages of the display. 64 – CENTER – RIGHT 63).
Use the PAGE buttons to switch pages. • At “LEFT 64”, the sound is all the way to the
left, at “RIGHT 63” all the way to the right. The
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a center point is CENTER.
part.
REV:
Depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the corre-
sponding item.
CHO:
Depth of the CHORUS (0 to 127).
<PAGE 1>
BEND RANGE:
Adjust the range of pitch change when the
PITCH BEND wheel is operated (0 to 12).

<PAGE 3>

PITCH POINT:
The pitch at which the pattern progression
sound is lowered by one octave.
• When the root note of the specified chord is
higher than the set pitch point, the pitch of that
part is automatically lowered by one octave,
thus avoiding an unnaturally high accompani-
EQ-Hi:
ment pitch.
Sound correction in the high range.
• This is effective only for the part for which the
Melody group was selected in CHORD MOD- • Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the stan-
IFY CHANGE. dard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ but-
tons to set the ratio of change.
SOUND:
Use the panel buttons to select the sound. EQ-Low:
Sound correction in the low range.
DIGI EFF: • Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the stan-
Set the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off. dard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ but-
• (SOUND) is the initialized setting of the sound. tons to set the ratio of change.

<PAGE 2>
Composer

BALANCE:
Adjust the volume balance.

110
QQTG0692

10_Part V.fm 111 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分

Part V Composer

Playback
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press the • The display looks similar to the following.
MEMORY button.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD

SIMPLE DANCE TRAD &
BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ

JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY
2. Select the desired memory (A/B/C).

LOAD
3. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a varia-
tion.

4. Press the START/STOP button.
• The DRUMS part begins to play back.
• The BASS and ACCOMP parts are played
back when you use the AUTO PLAY CHORD.

Step Record
Use STEP RECORD to store the notes one-by-one on the display. This is a convenient way to store com-
plicated patterns that are difficult to play.

Recording procedure
1. While you are recording, press the STEP 3. Use the PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2
RECORD button. display.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD
display similar to the following.

4. Use the left LENGTH buttons to specify the
note value. Select from r3, r, x3, x, e3, e, q3, q,
2. Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3 denotes a triplet-type
to the note position you are going to store. note.)
• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter- • For note values other than these, use the right
note (a thirty-second note). LENGTH buttons to specify the note value to
• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to be added to that which you specified with the
match the timing exactly with the 1/32-note left buttons.
steps. However, if you select triplet-type notes
for the note length (LENGTH) in step 4 below, Example: To record a dotted quarter-note (q.)
Composer

the timing is automatically corrected. q+e

(Continued on the next page)

111
QQTG0692

10_Part V.fm 112 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分

Part V Composer

5. Use the PHRS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to continue storing
actual length of the produced sound for the notes.
desired legato or staccato effect. • To record a different part, use the PART ∧ and
TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95% ∨ buttons to select another part.
of the note length. • The NOTE, VELOCITY, LENGTH, CHORD
NORM (normal): 80% MODIFY and CONTROL can be revised later.
STAC (staccato): 50% Press the OK button after the revision.
CUTT (cutting): 25%
• You can easily switch between the REALTIME
mode and the STEP mode any time during
6. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by recording. To return to the realtime recording
playing the keyboard. display during the STEP RECORD mode,
• The dot on the display where the note is press the EXIT button.
stored changes to a ∗ mark.
• When recording chords, you can store multiple
notes at one position.

REST: To store a rest, after specifying the note
LENGTH, press the REST button.
• Positions at which nothing is stored are read
as rests.
ERS: If you make a mistake, move the cursor to
the error, and after displaying the data
you wish to erase, press the ERS button.

Measure Edit
You can edit the recorded data one measure at a time.

Select the function you wish to edit.
1. During recording, press the MEASURE EDIT
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.

2. Select the function.

3. Follow the procedure to edit the function (see
below).

• Only the contents of the same pattern can be
edited.
Composer

112
QQTG0692

10_Part V.fm 113 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分

Part V Composer

MEASURE COPY
Copy recorded data of specified measures to a 2. Specify where you wish to copy the selected
specified point. measures to.
• On the destination track, the new data • On the TO side, specify the settings with the
replaces the current measure contents. corresponding buttons.

PART:
Select the part to copy to.

START MEASURE:
Specify the start point to copy the selected
measures to.

1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from 3. Press the OK button.
the source track (FROM). • The confirmation display appears. Press the
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with YES button to execute the function, or press
the corresponding buttons. the NO button to cancel the function.
• If the FROM and TO parts are the same and
PART: the FROM and TO measures overlap, copy is
Select the part to copy from. (If ALL is not possible.
selected, all parts are copied.)

FIRST MEASURE:
Specify the first measure to copy.

LAST MEASURE:
Specify the last measure to copy.

MEASURE ERASE
Erase the recorded contents of specific mea- 3. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
sures. specify the end point (measure number).
• Note that only the contents of the measures
are erased, not the measures themselves; the 4. Press the OK button.
length of the performance remains the same. • The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.

1. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
part.
• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the
specified measures of all the parts at one time.
Composer

2. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number).

113
QQTG0692

Composer 114 QQTG0692 . sures. YES button to execute the function. 2. 2. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the last measure to delete. or press • The confirmation display appears. • The length of the performance accordingly • The length of the performance accordingly decreases by the number of deleted mea.fm 114 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer MEASURE DELETE MEASURE INSERT Delete specified measures from all parts at once. 1. Use the NUMBER OF MEASURE button to • One measure is the smallest unit that can be select the number of blank measures to insert. or press the NO button to cancel the function. to 1. the Maj and Min data are erased at and ENDING at the same time. • When the INTRO or ENDING measures are • The Maj or Min data is inserted in the INTRO deleted. YES button to execute the function. the same time. Use the FIRST MEASURE button to select the specify the first measure to delete. Press the 3. Press the OK button. Press the the NO button to cancel the function. 10_Part V. Press the OK button. • The confirmation display appears. deleted. • No more than 16 measures total can be inserted. point (measure) where the measures are to be inserted. Insert blank measures at a specified point. 3. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons. increases by the number of inserted mea- sures.

Select the memory you wish to copy to. DRUMS 1 or 2 part. Composer 115 QQTG0692 . PAGE 2/2. RHYTHM: Rhythm name PATTERN: Pattern name 4. 4. press the EDIT button.10_Part V. • If you wish to use the COMPOSER functions to edit the copied data. 䡲 Copying individual parts • You can also copy a pattern from the 1. specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.fm 115 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer Pattern Copy Use this function to copy a pattern from a rhythm or from SEQUENCER data. specify the settings with the specify a part other than a DRUMS part. 2. all the patterns are cop- ied. On the FROM side. Specify the destination on the TO side to GROUP: Group name which the part will be copied. all the patterns are cop- ied. for other parts you can • In the FROM box. • The display looks similar to the following. select PATTERN COPY. PATTERN COPY Copy a rhythm to the COMPOSER. “COMPLETED!” appears on the dis- play. 1. • In the TO box. 3. • For the DRUM part you can specify the 2. • When copying has been successfully com- pleted. corresponding buttons. B or C) PATTERN: Pattern name • If ALL is selected. 3. Use the PAGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select MEMORY. • If ALL is selected. • The display looks similar to the following. Press the OK button. Select the pattern you wish to copy. and follow the procedure to record a pattern. Press the OK button. On the COMPOSER MENU display. MEMORY: Memory name (A. use the buttons to specify the part to copy from.

if a mea- • The display looks similar to the following. 10_Part V. (Refer to page 106. and follow the procedure to record a pat- 3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the number of the last measure to copy. 1. select tern. • In the case of INTRO or ENDING.) • Be sure that time signature setting in the 10. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the key of the copied measures (−24 to +24). specify the SEQUENCER to confirm the tracks. the time signature in the COMPOSER mem- ory you are copying to are the same. Use the PATTERN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pattern to copy to. 7.fm 116 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分 Part V Composer SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY Data from the SEQUENCER can be copied to a COMPOSER memory. you can use a rhythm pattern on a song disk as the auto- matic accompaniment for your own performance. • Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify the part name. to edit the copied data. sures and the time signature you wish to copy. 5. 6. press the EDIT but- ton. Composer 116 QQTG0692 . SEQUENCER track from which to copy data. and the TRACK ∧ and ∨ but- 2. SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY. • Units are in semitones. On the COMPOSER MENU display. SEQUENCER data you are copying from and • “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. Follow the procedure in “Prepare to record” to tons to specify the track number. For each COMPOSER part. it is reproduced in the other pattern as well. prepare the COMPOSER memory you will be • Parts which are set to OFF are blank. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the first measure to copy. copying to. or the • If you wish to use the COMPOSER function data will not be copied successfully. Use the MEMORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the COMPOSER memory to copy to. the mea. sure contains a Maj or Min command. Play back the song you wish to copy from 9. For example. 4. Press the OK button. 8.

• The BACK UP data will not be erased even Floppy Disk Drive with the passage of time.44 MB) disks. in the PERFORMANCE group. BACKUP • The SEQUENCER contents can be saved in MIDI & FAVORITES one-song increments (SEQUENCER SONG SAVE). • A ∗ mark indicates that data can be loaded to and from a specific memory (SINGLE LOAD). 2HD disks format- ted as 2DD cannot be used.5 inch 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1. it is recom- PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories) mended that you save it with other data as EFFECT MEMORY* Keyboard backup data. Eject button 117 QQTG0692 . as well as play commercial recorded disks on this instrument. however. • You can use 3. the Disk Drive maximizes your control of data management by allowing you to store (SAVE) this instrument’s data on disks. it is rec- • Please use 2HD disks to load/save BACKUP ommended that you use the performance data data. Internal memory and Disk Drive The storable internal memory of this instrument as well as the backup time are limited. and then to recall (LOAD) it at any time.fm 117 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Disk Drive (KN2400) Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Outline of the Disk Drive function The Disk Drive enables you to store recorded and stored data from this instrument’s memories on disks. • When creating or saving song data. However. 䡲 The following data can be saved/loaded: SAVE LOAD PERFORMANCE CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings) PANEL MEMORY* SEQUENCER Floppy disk COMPOSER* (MEMORY contents) • Instead of using MIDI & FAVORITES as fre- SOUND MEMORY* quently loaded and saved data.11_Part VI. Main parts of the Disk Drive Eject button Disk slot Press to remove the disk from the Disk Drive.

in order but not saved. etc. GM LEVEL 2 is a uni- loaded. * DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of 䡲 About Standard MIDI Files the YAMAHA Corporation. PERFORMANCE PADS and PianoDisc™ Song data into your instrument to expand its potential even further. and vice versa. data such as NOTE data (keyboard performance data). but DIRECT PLAY lets you enjoy playing commer- also data from commercial song disks can be cially sold song disks directly from a disk. it may be neces- sary for you to adjust the settings to your satis- 䡲 GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 (GM2) faction. at the time of recording. can be displayed. It’s fast read on this instrument. Equipment which conforms to GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 standards is indicated by the following logo. mats: TECHNICS File format • DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following disks: Standard MIDI File format Standard MIDI File 䡲 Loading Technics File format disks Standard MIDI File with Lyrics Using Technics file format disks allows you load DISK ORCHESTRA new SOUND EDIT. * All product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.fm 118 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Using commercial song disks Playback of commercial song disks Not only disks recorded on this instrument. that improves on existing GM standards. to realize an enhanced performance expression. 118 QQTG0692 . • This instrument also conforms to GENERAL MIDI playback. COLLECTION™ (DOC) PANEL MEMORY. Note. rhythm & accompaniments. Because it does not guarantee 100% faithful reproduction of recorded music which is replete with such data. 11_Part VI. This instrument complies with GENERAL MIDI • Only files with the “. however. This different models can be played back on this instrument supports this format.MID” extension can be (GM) LEVEL 2 standards. form world standard for MIDI sound generators • Standard MIDI File FORMAT 1 can be loaded. VELOCITY (how hard the keyboard is played). • This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be Sound generators of this class can reproduce vir- saved to a disk in Standard MIDI File (FOR- tually the identical conditions that were in effect MAT 0) and can be used by other equipment. “Standard MIDI File” (SMF) is a standardized data format which makes it possible for music 䡲 SMF with LYRICS SMF with LYRICS is a format in which character data to be exchanged among different sequenc- information that is included with the MIDI data. PROGRAM NUMBER data (voice num- ber data). that ble to view the lyrics on the display while a per- Standard MIDI Files ensure the compatibility of formance is played back. making it possi- instrument. ers. Data stored in this format on sequencers of such as karaoke lyrics. because you don’t have to load the disk data into • This instrument accepts the following file for. your instrument’s memory.

119 QQTG0692 . Select a menu on the DISK MENU display. Push it ■ About the menu all the way in until you hear a click.fm 119 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Outline of the procedure 1. 䡲 DISK IN USE PREFERENCES (page 130) Used to specify which screen is to be jumped DISK DISK IN USE to as well as the preferred file when a disk is inserted. The PREFER- ENCES menu is used to specify which display is shown when a disk is inserted. such as disk format. 4. memory. Follow the procedure for the function (see SAVE (page 125) below). Load data from a disk into this instrument’s turn on the DISK button. • To prevent data loss.11_Part VI. commercial song disks and medley playback. When you have finished setting the functions. • On this instrument. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot. the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting DIRECT PLAY (page 122) the current function. it automatically changes to the DISK MENU display when a disk is inserted into the Disk Drive (initialized settings). LOAD (page 120) • If the DISK MENU display does not appear. TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. DISK IN USE USE DISK IN DISK LOAD This indicator is lit continuously as long as the power is on. Save data from this instrument’s memory to a • When function is being set. do not eject the disk or turn off the power while this indicator is lit. LOAD DISK TOOLS (page 128) Disk management procedures. 3. if the normal display is active. SONG MEDLEY (page 124) Medley playback of songs in the disk (Tech- DISK DISK IN USE nics format). turn off the DISK button. if the disk. This indicator lights when data is being loaded or saved. 2. Direct playback of SMF etc.

“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. Use the buttons below the display to select the been saved. how- ever.. (This type is available for disks used with older Technics models. that in this case. LOAD Load data that saved to a disk into this instru- ment’s memory. • When the operation has been successfully completed. Press the LOAD button. • Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be erased. the dis- play automatically changes to the SMF LOAD 2. • The LOAD operation begins.indicates that this type of data has not 3. to load an SMF file. Use the buttons below the display to specify display.. • If song data was loaded. Push it all the way in until you hear one song can be recorded in the a click. you can press the START/STOP button to begin playback when the SEQUENCER PLAY display is active. • .. 11_Part VI. Press the LOAD button. select LOAD. • The display looks similar to the following. 120 QQTG0692 . 䡲 LOAD OPTION Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the disk to your instrument. 1.. the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO). SEQUENCER. press the SMF button. 4. 2. song (Technics file) you wish to load. • The LOAD operation begins.) Note. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE • The display looks similar to the following. the song is loaded into SONG 1. (Refer to next page.) 3. • This setting is canceled when you quit the • If there are SMF files on the disk and you wish LOAD display or when another file is selected. 1. 2/3 LOAD OPTION display. • You can also access the LOAD display by pressing the DISK button for a few seconds.fm 120 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Loading data Recall (load) the data from the disk to this instrument’s memories. • If there are only SMF files on the disk. On the DISK MENU display. Insert the disk with the stored data into the • You can load the type of data for which only Disk Drive. but the data in SONG memories 2 to 10 are erased.

COMPOSER • If the number of files is 10 or more. 5. you can (MEMORY). Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load 3. Load data which was saved in the “Standard (The volume balance and octave settings MIDI File” (SMF) format. data that cannot be processed by this instrument is ignored. play- • For disks which contain SMF files only. the sounds.) 1. BANK: GM/GM2 → GM2: Load one bank at a time. that in which the song was stored. etc. octaves. • Songs to load are specified one at a time. • If you press the TECH button. Use the buttons below the display to select the You can specify which data to load from a disk filename you wish to load. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE mat. Activate the GM2 initialized settings. NX → NX: Active the NX SOUND settings. • If you press the START/STOP button. Use the MODE button to select the data you TO SONG button. Use the TO SONG button to select the num- ber to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER song number). switch the displayed data. DISK: Disk name SONG: Song name 3. 121 QQTG0692 . • You can use the INFORMATION button to • The display looks similar to the following. Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the method. and SINGLE: load GM/GM2 data. • The LOAD operation begins. wish to load. • The song name to load to is shown below the 2. GM/GM2 → NX: specified data. Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings. • During the LOAD operation. and arrangement of percussion instrument sounds.11_Part VI. TEC → NX: memory location) for TO. 3/3 SINGLE LOAD display. (except for SEQUENCER) Select from the following. this back of the loaded data begins. 4. was executed) memory. press the • If you select the setting which is different from SMF button. will be different. may differ from the saved settings. load increment. Follow the appropriate procedure to load the NX data. • When the operation has been successfully completed. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. into a specific PANEL MEMORY.fm 121 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) 䡲 SINGLE LOAD 2. display appears automatically when LOAD is selected on the DISK MENU display. SOUND MEMORY. Press the LOAD button. the display changes to the LOAD display for Technics for- 1. • Specify the data source for SONG (left side). Load the smallest data increment. and load SMF data that was saved in the 䡲 SMF LOAD TECHNICS mode on a previous model. Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings. and load 4. • The display looks similar to the following. and load GM/GM2 data. and the data destination (this instrument’s PREV. On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display. EFFECT use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when SONG SAVE or advance 10 files at a time.

LOAD Direct Play You can enjoy immediate playback of “Standard MIDI File” (SMF). select DIRECT SONG: Song name PLAY. • For SMF files. you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP 3.fm 122 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) 䡲 COMPOSER LOAD • The display looks similar to the following. Select the name of the file you wish to load. (This cannot be changed during playback. 122 QQTG0692 . On the DISK MENU display. you can data of that song is automatically changed by use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back the same ratio. Press the START button. 11_Part VI. 1. 䡲 Adjusting the playback tempo Even with a song having recorded tempo data. 1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section. even in song data or advance 10 files at a time. • When the tempo is changed. in which tempo change data is stored. a single • For SMF files. • The selected song is played back. you can use the INFO button to Disk Drive.) 4. DISK: Disk name 2. switch the displayed data. Accordingly. GM2: GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 NX: NX SOUND PREV. TEC: Data from Technics instruments not having NX SOUND capability. Use the buttons below the display to select the TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking. use the MIDI OUT button to specify whether or not MIDI data is output dur- <Example: SMF> ing playback (ON/OFF). RHYTHM GROUP POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ 2. use the PLAY AS button to adjustment of the tempo produces a natural- specify a sound arrangement mode. all the tempo • If the number of files is 10 or more. song you wish to have played. Load COMPOSER data only from a disk. “Disk Orchestra Collection” (DOC) and “PianoDisc” disks—all without loading the song data. SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY • Data is loaded to this instrument’s COM- POSER memory (MEMORY). sounding playback. Press the LOAD button. press and hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few seconds. • The display looks similar to the following. JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & 3. Insert the disk with the stored data into the • For SMF files.

by pressing the • Medley playback begins. set the MED- LEY settings. Use the ON/OFF but- tons and set the track you want to MUTE to ON. Fast forward Repeat these steps to create your own list of Play/pause songs to have played back. Press the START button. • If ALL is pressed. you can play a keyboard performance on the channel which was last set to MUTE.11_Part VI. • For SMF disks: 2. • For PIANO DISC playback: You can use the PART 1 and ORCH (other accompaniment parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or OFF. songs saved on a disk can <Example: SMF> be played back continuously in a medley. and the songs are played back in order in a med- ley. etc. • You can use the buttons below the display to Next song select a song to add to the song list. you can use the For a “minus one” performance. M02 etc. • Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF the display changes to the MIC REVERB & for repeat playback of the medley. LYRICS button. 1. • For DOC disks: You can use the PART 1. the lyrics are shown on the display. pause. you can • During playback. PART 2 and ORCH (other accompaniment parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or OFF.fm 123 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) 䡲 The display during playback 䡲 MEDLEY PLAY With DIRECT PLAY. • During medley playback. On the DIRECT PLAY display. For “SMF with LYRICS” disks. TRACK MUTE ∧. Stop next to the file name indicates its order in the Previous song list. ward. • If you press the MIC button during playback. song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD ton you can change the settings for each part. 123 QQTG0692 . all the files are selected. the buttons below the display use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back are used for player functions such as fast for. ∨ buttons to select the chan- nel you wish to mute. use the SKIP button to skip to the next song. or advance 10 files at a time. then press the ADD button to add it to the list. if you press the MIXER but. • If the number of files is 10 or more. A M01. the files are dese- lected. If ALL is pressed again. button. • You can delete a marked file from the medley • During playback. Following this. EFFECT setting display.

• Medley playback begins. • You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD button. Repeat these steps to create your own list of songs to have played back. Press the START button. 2. • During a medley performance. • During the performance. M02 etc. the display changes to the DIRECT PLAY display.fm 124 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Song Medley Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to a disk (disk data) in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back in a medley. then press the ADD button to add it to the song list. and the songs are played back in numerical in a medley. you can use the SKIP button to skip to the next song. 124 QQTG0692 . if you press the MIXER button you can change the settings for each part. 11_Part VI. Select the order of files in the medley. 3. but no TECHNICS FORMAT file. 1. select SONG MEDLEY from the display. all the files are selected. • You can select a file and song. 10 SNGS: Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are played in a medley. • You can use the MODE button to select the medley mode. • During a medley performance. next to the file name indicates its order in the list. • The display looks similar to the following. • If ALL is pressed. A M01. On the DISK MENU display. • Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat playback of the medley. • If the disk contains SMF or other files. 1 SONG: Only song 1 from each SONG is played back in a medley. the display changes to the playback display.

Insert a formatted disk into the Disk Drive slot. select SAVE. • The display looks similar to the following. you may not be able to use your 2HD disk data with other musical instru- ment models. the write-protect (1. Select the type of data save you want. Push it all the way in until you hear a click. 3.5 inch 2DD (720KB) or 2HD • When saving data to the disk. Therefore. TECHNICS FORMAT: Save this instrument’s data in the Technics File format. 2.44MB) disks. • A disk which is used with this instrument for the first time must first be formatted. • How to distinguish the two disk types: Storage is not Storage is 2DD 2HD possible possible No hole Hole Open Closed • Although 2HD disks can hold more data and are convenient for quick loading and saving. On the DISK MENU display. some models may be able to read only 2DD disks. SAVE 1. SMF FORMAT 0: Save the SEQUENCER data in the “Stan- dard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0).fm 125 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Saving data The recorded data and panel settings of this instrument can be saved on a disk. Disks You can use 3. tab must be closed.11_Part VI. 125 QQTG0692 .

select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name assignment. 11_Part VI. To maximize effective use of disk memory • For PANEL MEMORY. all the indicated data is saved.fm 126 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後2時48分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) 䡲 TECHNICS FORMAT 3. display. • Press the PERFORM button to select all the • The display looks similar to the following. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3 SAVE OPTION display. Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A. 3. which data is currently saved. performance data. 5. disk. • Press the DEL button to erase the character at 1. <SAVE OPTION> 2. the file number you wish to save to. Use the buttons below the display to assign a name. 1. Press the SAVE button. shown in a frame on the right side of the • Press the →← button to center the name. of data you wish to save. 4. but you can use the • The display returns to the SAVE display. • If you attempt to save data to a file number in • The display looks similar to the following. SAVE OPTION to select specific data to save. 2. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE procedure. all the set- tings change to NO. the display changes to the confirmation display. select from NO/1 or to minimize the save time. 126 QQTG0692 . MANCE data is selected. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire • The types of data that can be saved are name. Use the buttons below the display to specify Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO). or press the BACKUP but- ton to select all the back up data at once. Use the buttons below the display to specify the cursor position. • Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position. • Set the character input position with the POSI- TION buttons. • The SAVE operation begins. select only the type BANK/ALL. • If the ALL OFF button is pressed. the NAME button. If you press the SAVE button. or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it. If you wish to assign a name to the file. press • The SAVE operation begins. Press the OK button. Ordinarily PERFOR. Press the SAVE button.

3. 1. • The SAVE operation begins. Use the buttons below the display to assign a name.) 2. you can convert the patterns of the automatic accompaniment. ON: The sound and volume settings for each part are saved as data at the beginning of the file. press the NAME button. Data such as chord and rhythm data. 4. (Refer to page 100. 3. Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the SEQUENCER song number you wish to save. To overwrite a file. 6. note data. • The song name to save from is shown below the FROM SONG button. Press the OK button. 5. • The display returns to the SAVE display. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3 • What you can save in the SMF format (FOR- SEQUENCER SONG SAVE display. such as • The display looks similar to the following. OFF: This data is not saved. MAT 0) is ordinary performance data. If you wish to assign a name to the file. use the ▲ and ▼ buttons and then select a song name. 1. is not saved.11_Part VI. to SMF data. Press the SAVE button. Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify ON or OFF. • If the number of files is 10 or more. saved in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FOR- MAT 0) for use on other instruments. etc. COMPOSER data. Use the buttons below the display to select the song number you wish to save. save the data in the Technics File for- mat. • If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT func- tion of the SEQUENCER. you can use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files at a time. If you wish to also save this special Technics data. etc. 2.fm 127 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) <SEQUENCER SONG SAVE> 䡲 SMF FORMAT 0 You can specify a single song in the This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be SEQUENCER to save to the disk. (Continued on the next page) 127 QQTG0692 .

inserted into the Disk Drive slot and you attempt • Use the buttons to the left and right of the dis. ON to inserting a before the beginning of the performance. changes to the confirmation display. Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to 8. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the No space is added. • When the operation has been successfully OFF: completed. 䡲 RENAME: Assign a name to a file. display. the DISK play to access the corresponding setting dis. and disk format. which data is currently saved. to execute the save or load procedure. When an unformatted disk is SMF/TECH files. Follow the instruc- play. • Use the buttons below the display to select a 䡲 FORMAT file. Disks which are used for the first time with this • You can press the SMF/TECH button to instrument have to be formatted through the fol- change to the display for procedures related to lowing procedure. 䡲 COPY (TECH): Copy a file. execute it. ON: 9. On the DISK MENU display. beginning of the file. a space is added each time a file is saved. be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE SPACE to or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it. Press the the start of playback may be delayed. 128 QQTG0692 . Disk management Various disk management procedures. Delete a file. please set it to OFF each time the file is subsequently saved. This can YES button to continue the SAVE procedure. file copy. 2. A one-measure space is added to the • The SAVE operation begins. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot. Press the SAVE button. 䡲 DEL: • The display looks similar to the following. FORMAT display appears. tions shown to format the disk. 11_Part VI. 䡲 INFO (DISK/SONG) (SMF files only): Select whether to display the disk data or the 3. Therefore.fm 128 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) 7. 䡲 MOVE (TECH): Replace a file. select DISK TOOLS from the display. • If you attempt to save data to a file name in • When there is various data other than perfor. if you have already saved a file once with the 1 MEASURE SPACE set to ON. are available from the DISK TOOLS menu. such as file delete. • When set to ON. the display mance data stored at the beginning of a file. DISK TOOLS 1. Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound select ON or OFF. Select a function and follow the procedure to song names. generator mode (GM/GM2/NX).

abc button. • Be sure to select the type which is the same as your disk type. 3. • The display looks similar to the following. • When the YES button is pressed. 129 QQTG0692 . Press the OK button. • Set the character input position with the POSI- TION buttons.fm 129 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) • Note that this procedure clears any data which is currently stored on the disk. • Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position. 2. • Press the →← button to center the name. without showing the type select display. • If you wish to select the type again. • Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC. Press the YES button to format the disk. select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name assignment. formatting is completed and DISK NAMING display is shown. Use the buttons below the display to assign a name. 1. use the PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2 display. 4. the dis- play changes directly to the following display. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.11_Part VI. disk format begins. or press the NO button to cancel the format. After about 1–2 minutes. • If the type is automatically detected. Select the type of format (2DD or 2HD). • Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor position.

fm 130 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分 Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) Disk Drive (KN2400) Set the automatic display when a disk is inserted When a disk is inserted in the Disk Drive. select PREFER- ENCES. DISK MENU. 130 QQTG0692 . Follow this procedure to customize the automatic display. and the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting. DIRECT PLAY. 2. On the DISK MENU display. Press the OK button. the display automatically changes to a disk-procedure display. • During playback. recording or changing the settings. PREFERENCES 1. DISK INSERT OPTION: The display automatically changes to a disk- procedure display when a disk is inserted in the Disk Drive (OFF. 3. 11_Part VI. the displays unrelated to the settings made here do not change. SONG MEDLEY). • The display looks similar to the following. Use the buttons to the left of the display to select the item. LOAD. FILE TYPE PRIORITY: Specify the desired priority ranking of dis- played files when several types of files are recorded on one disk (TECHNICS/SMF).

fm 131 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Outline of the SD card SD Card (KN2600) The data generated by this instrument can be stored and managed on an SD card in SMF or TECHNICS format.12_Part VII. Structure of the SD card format Play an SD card SD-AUDIO Music (audio) data Besides saving. Follow the procedure for the function (see ure. Open the lid of the SD slot. SD SD IN USE LOAD 5. you can enjoy playback of audio SD-SOUND SMF data or SMF data saved on the SD card. Close the lid. 131 QQTG0692 . • Open it completely. 2. Select a menu on the SD MENU display. (Refer to pages 136. The instrument inner memory data can be man- aged using the high space capacity of the SD SD-SOUND card. (See page SD card 119. Insert the SD card. • When function is being set. 3. 6.) Outline of the procedure 1. The data which can be saved and loaded is SMF data (SD-SOUND format) saved on the same as the DISK DRIVE (KN2400). if the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. Press the SD button to turn it on. the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. 137. • Push the card until it locks as shown in the fig. below). • No operation is possible when the lid is open.) PRIVATE local data of the instrument SD-AUDIO Management inner memory data AUDIO data stored on an SD card using SD format software. 4.

To prevent data loss. FAVORITE SONGS (page 143) SD PREFERENCES (page 145) Arrange the order of your favorite songs Set the priority for displaying while saving or stored on the card. do not eject the card or turn off the power while this indicator is lit. 132 QQTG0692 . while card. Also. such as LOAD or SAVE. SD TOOLS (page 144) SAVE (page 140) Card management procedures. Load data into this instrument from the card. format. 䡲 Removing the SD card press the SD button to turn it off. Attention Note that no sound is produced when perform- ing SD card operations.fm 132 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) 7. loading data. such as card Save data on the card from this instrument. the instrument produces no sound when one of following displays appears (The keyboard will emit sound. SD SONG MEDLEY (page 139) Play back music data on the card (TECHNICS LOAD (page 130) format) successively in a medley.): • LOAD (TECH) PAGE 3 • SD SONG MEDLEY • COPY FROM DISK (SD TOOLS) • SD-SOUND EXPORT/IMPORT (SD-TOOLS) 䡲 SD MENU SD-AUDIO PLAY (page 136) Play back audio data stored on the card. 䡲 SD IN USE SD Card (KN2600) SD SD IN USE LOAD • This indicator lights when accessing to the SD When the SD IN USE indicator is not lit. 12_Part VII. opening the lid. SD-SOUND PLAY (page 137) Play directory SD-SOUND (SMF) data on the card. When you have finished setting the functions. push the center of the card to unlock it.

• The LOAD operation begins. (See page 131. SD SD IN USE ALPHABET (See page 134. Use the buttons below the display to select the one song can be recorded in the SEQUEN- SONG you wish to load. but the data in SONG memories 2 to and the NEXT button for the next page. numbers. Press the LOAD button. the SONG name. you can press the START/STOP button to begin playback when the SEQUENCER PLAY display is active. Press the SD button to turn it on. 10 are erased. (This type is available for cards used • Select the folder name first. NUMBER (See page 134. • When the operation has been successfully completed. • You can also access the LOAD display by pressing the SD button for a few seconds.12_Part VII. On the SD MENU display. and then select with older Technics models. (Refer to page 145. • You can load the type of data for which only 1.) 3. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. 133 QQTG0692 . Insert the SD card with the stored data into the 4. Select files to load specifying folder and song • The display looks similar to the following. • Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be erased. 䡲 FOLDER 2. Use the buttons to the right of the display to SD slot. the song is loaded into • Press the PREV button for the previous page SONG 1. that in this case. select LOAD. however.fm 133 ページ 2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Loading data Load the data from the SD card to this instrument’s memories. CER. FOLDER: 2.) select the type of loading. • Close the lid securely. the dis- play automatically changes to the SD-SOUND (SMF) LOAD display. • The priority that sets which display is shown first can be set at the SD PREFERENCES dis- play. • If song data was loaded.) Note. SD Card (KN2600) SD LOAD Load data that saved to a card into this instru- ment’s memory. 1. Select files to load from a list of all folders and of saved songs in each folder.) LOAD Select files to load from an alphabetical list of all songs.) • If there are only SMF files on the card.

Press the LOAD button. number. Use the MODE button to select the data you • This setting is canceled when you quit the wish to load. load increment. 12_Part VII. SONG SAVE was executed) memory. Use the buttons below the display to specify the song number. 3. Follow the appropriate procedure to load the specified data. • The display looks similar to the following. and then to be loaded. 2. <LOAD OPTION> <SINGLE LOAD> Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the You can specify which data to load from an SD SD card to your instrument.) 3. • .indicates that this type of data has not been saved. Press the LOAD button. 1 for the number 1. SOUND MEMORY. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE 3/3 display.. and the data destination (this instrument’s memory location) for TO. 2. (except for SEQUENCER) • The LOAD operation begins. SD Card (KN2600) 1. BANK: Load one bank at a time.. 1.. card into a specific PANEL MEMORY. Press the LOAD button. 2. • The display looks similar to the following. select the SONG (01–20). 134 QQTG0692 . Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE EFFECT MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when 2/3 display. 1. 4. Use the buttons below the display to specify the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO). Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the 3. LOAD display or when another file is selected. SINGLE: Load the smallest data increment. COM- POSER (MEMORY). • Press the PREV button for the previous page • A number should be specifyed as a 2-digits and the NEXT button for the next page. 1. • Specify the data source for SONG (left side). select a song by specifying the song number. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify the song • Specify the FOLDER (01–99) first. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the alpha- betical letter or the display page. MAT on the SD card.fm 134 ページ 2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) 䡲 ALPHABET 䡲 NUMBER Load the file from an alphabetical list of all songs From all songs saved in the TECHNICS FOR- saved in TECHNICS format on the SD card.. (Press 0. 2.

In the RHYTHM GROUP section. will be different. RHYTHM GROUP • If you press the PLAYLIST EDIT button. the SD Card (KN2600) POP ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD display changes to the PLAYLIST EDIT dis- play. the SONG seconds. etc. LOAD • Songs to load are specified one at a time. and arrangement of percussion 1. play- back of the loaded data begins. Press the LOAD button. JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN & 3. GM/GM2 → GM2: Activate the GM2 initialized settings. (See page 138. • The SEQUENCER song name to load to is shown below the TO SONG button. and the NEXT button for the next page. • The display looks similar to the following. data that cannot • For cards which contain SD-SOUND data be processed by this instrument is ignored. only. 135 QQTG0692 . Use the buttons below the display to select the Load COMPOSER data only from a card. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.12_Part VII. this display appears automatically when LOAD is selected on the SD MENU display. • Select the folder name first. On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display. SONG name you wish to load. (The volume balance and octave settings may differ from the saved settings. • Select from the following. that in which the song was stored. 5. NX → NX: 2. Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load method. the display changes to the LOAD dis- SIMPLE DANCE TRAD & BEAT CLUB USA WALTZ play for the TECHNICS SONG.fm 135 ページ 2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) 䡲 COMPOSER LOAD 2. • When the operation has been successfully completed. Use the buttons below the display to select the Active the NX SOUND settings. SELECT button to specify the SONG. TEC → NX: • Data is loaded to this instrument’s COM. Press the LOAD button. press the instrument sounds. press and • Use the PLAYLIST button to specify the hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few PLAYLIST (see page 138). GM/GM2 → NX: • Press the PREV button for the previous page Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings. NX data. SD-SOUND button. 4. octaves. and load GM/GM2 data. and load GM/GM2 data. Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings. and load SONG you wish to load. • During the LOAD operation. • If you press the START/STOP button. • The LOAD operation begins. the sounds. 1. • The display looks similar to the following. Use the TO SONG button to select the num- SWING & SHOW WORLD MEMORY ber to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER song number). POSER memory (MEMORY). and load SMF data that was saved in the TECHNICS mode on a previous model. 3.) SD-SOUND LOAD (SMF) • If you select the setting which is different from Load SD-SOUND (SMF) data from the SD card.)If you press the TECH button. and then select the SONG name. PREV.

NORMAL: For playing back the songs in sequential order. 136 QQTG0692 . 12_Part VII. • You can select PLAY LIST using the PLAYL- IST SELECT button as necessary. select SD-AUDIO (hold the button) PLAY. • Adjust the volume for playback using the VOL ∧ and ∨ buttons. you can select the type of playback. 1. • The display looks similar to the following. • Close the lid securely after inserting the card. Fast forward (hold the button) Skip to the previous. • Using the PLAY MODE button. 2. Rewind 3. On the SD MENU display. Press the SD button to turn it on. (See page 131. ALL REPEAT: For playing back all the songs repetitively. 1 SONG REPEAT: For playing back a song repetitively.) below the display.fm 136 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) SD-Audio Play Play back audio data on the SD card saved by a PC. Playback the data by pressing the button SD Card (KN2600) played into the SD slot. SD SD IN USE Volume Stop Playback/ Pause LOAD Skip to the next. Insert the SD card with the stored data to be 4. etc.

• Using the PLAY MODE button. • The display looks similar to the following. PLAY. you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking. You can also assign the part to play with the keyboard using 3. (Refer to page 135. a single adjustment of the tempo produces a natural- 4. • Adjust the volume for playback using VOL. • For the function of each button. back the data. you can select the type of playback. even in song data in which tempo change data is stored. all the tempo data of that song is automatically changed by the same ratio. select SD-SOUND the CONDUCTOR. 1 SONG: For playing back only one song. The part being muted last is assigned to the keyboard. Press the SD button to turn it on. • The PLAY AS button functions like as the LOAD AS button. Accordingly. 䡲 Adjusting the playback tempo Even with a song having recorded tempo data.12_Part VII. • To have a minus-one play. • Press the LYRICS button to show the lyrics. play the part with the keyboard. On the SD MENU display. NORMAL: For playing back the songs in sequential order. • Press the PLAYLIST SELECT button to select a PLAYLIST. (See page 131. Press the buttons above the display to play sounding playback.) 137 QQTG0692 . see page 136. use the ∧ and ∨ SD Card (KN2600) 1. ALL REPEAT: For playing back all the songs repetitively. • When the tempo is changed. so that you can 2. • Lyrics of the SMF with LYRICS files can be also displayed.fm 137 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) SD-Sound Play Play back SMF data saved on the SD card (SD-SOUND). ON/OFF to the part. 1 SONG REPEAT: For playing back a single song repetitively.) buttons to select a part or parts and set • Close the lid securely after inserting the card. Insert the SD card with the stored data to be played into the SD slot.

On the PLAYLIST SELECT display. 3. • Use the MOVE button to change the order of the songs. EDIT button. You can freely name this type of play lists. you can create a new PLAYL- IST which contains your favorite songs selected from the DEFAULT PLAYLIST or other PLAYL- ISTs. rently edited. blank PLAYLIST as a TARGET PLAYL- 1. GET PLAYLIST. 12_Part VII. (Refer to page • Press the TARGET PLAYLIST NAMING but- 137. Edit the PLAYLIST. within the following limits.) ton to name the PLAYLIST which is being cur- • The display looks similar to the following.” SD TOOLS display. ton on the SD-SOUND display. press the IST. the song data itself will be deleted on the card. This creates a new PLAYLIST of the selected songs with assigned song numbers. The explanation of the PLAYLIST is as follows. which are currently selected on the “Target • You can edit the DEFAULT PLAYLIST on the Playlist. PLAYLIST EDIT You can edit a PLAYLIST for SD-SOUND freely • Press the DEL button to delete the songs except for the DEFAULT PLAYLIST. Press the OK button. 2. • Select the songs to copy from in the left col- umn of the display. If You can create PLAYLISTs on an SD card you delete a song from the default PLAYLIST. • Maximum number of PLAYLISTs: 99 • Maximum number of songs: 999 <PLAYLIST> • Maximum number of songs in a PLAYLIST: When the music data is transferred to the SD 99 card from a PC. a play list is created automati- cally on the card.) • Press the PLAYLIST NEW button to select a new. • Press the PLAYLIST DEL button to delete • The PLAYLIST SELECT display appears PLAYLIST which is currently selected as TAR- when you press the PLAYLIST SELECT but.fm 138 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Playlist The instrument handles the SD-AUDIO/SD-SOUND files in PLAYLIST units. Also. 138 QQTG0692 . (Refer to page 144. assign to them desired song numbers for the TARGET PLAYLIST and press the SET button. PLAYLIST type SD Card (KN2600) There are two types of PLAYLIST. <DEFAULT PLAYLIST: (Total list)> MEMO A collection of all data saved in an SD card.

you can use the SKIP button to skip to the next song. 1. • Medley playback begins.) • Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat playback of the medley. medley list. • Press the DEL button to delete the songs selected in the LIST column. • Press the FOLDER SELECT button to select the folder to play. 139 QQTG0692 . 1 SONG: Only song 1 from each SONG is played back in a medley. • During a medley performance. On the SD MENU display. select SD SONG MEDLEY.fm 139 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) SD Song Medley Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to an SD card in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back in a melody. and repeat those 2. if you press the MIXER button you can change the settings for each part. press the SET button. Select one of three USER LISTs (1 to 3) using the MODE button and then press the USER LIST EDIT button. (See below. USER LIST 1-3: Lists which can be set freely. Press the START button. • During the performance. • You can use the INTERNAL button to select the medley mode. You can create up to three USER LISTs. ALL SONG: • The USER LIST settings are memorised inde- A list of all songs in all folders pendently on each card. 3.12_Part VII. • During a medley performance. FOLDER: A list of all songs in a selected folder. • Select FOLDER and SONG. 2. Press the MODE button to select the type of steps. specify the sequence of songs in the LIST column to the right. 䡲 Making a USER LIST SD Card (KN2600) 1. 10 SNGS: Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are played in a medley. the display changes to the playback display. • The display looks similar to the following. Specify the order of songs to play in medley.

Insert an SD card for saving into the SD slot. 5. MANCE data is selected. but you can use the • The display returns to the SAVE display. the song number you wish to save to. • If you attempt to save data to a SONG number in which data is currently saved. Use the buttons below the display to specify cursor position. shown in a frame on the right side of the • Press the →← button to center the name. Save this instrument’s data in the Technics File format. • Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC. select SAVE.) TECHNICS FORMAT: 2. • Set the character input position with the POSI- TION buttons. Use the buttons below the display to assign a name. Press SD button to turn it on. 140 QQTG0692 . 4. select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name assignment. Ordinarily PERFOR.fm 140 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Saving Data The internal data of this instrument can be saved on the SD card. all the indicated data is saved. the SONG NAMING button. Press the SAVE button. (See page 131. • Press the INS button to enter a space at the 1. Press the OK button. SAVE SD Card (KN2600) 1. or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it. • The SAVE operation begins. display. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire • The types of data that can be saved are name. the SONG number. On the SD MENU display. 4. • The display looks similar to the following. 䡲 TECHNICS FORMAT 3. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE procedure. • Press the DEL button to erase the character at • Select the FOLDER number first. • If you wish to assign a name to the folder. the display changes to the confirmation display. If you wish to assign a name to the file. and select the cursor position. press low the operation described above. Select the type of data save you want. press the FOLDER RENAME button and fol- 2. abc button. • The display looks similar to the following. SAVE OPTION to select specific data to save. SD-SOUND (SMF) FORMAT: Save the SEQUENCER data as SD-SOUND (SMF) data. 12_Part VII. 3. If you press the SAVE button.

save the data in the Technics File for. etc. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3 dis- play. To maximize effective use of SD card CER to save to the SD card. 4. • For PANEL MEMORY. Use the buttons below the display to assign a name. such as note data. to SMF data. MEMO • Press the PERFORM button to select all the You can save data on an SD card within the performance data. Maximum number of letters for the song or folder name: 16 3. SD Card (KN2600) 1. play. all the set. • Maximum number of songs in a folder: 20 tings change to NO. Data such as chord and rhythm data.fm 141 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) <SAVE OPTION> <SEQUENCER SONG SAVE> Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the You can specify a single song in the SEQUEN- SD card. 2. or press the BACKUP but. Use the buttons below the display to select the song number you wish to save. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3 dis. (Refer to page 100. 䡲 SD-SOUND (SMF) FORMAT This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be saved in the SD-SOUND format. • The SAVE operation begins.12_Part VII. 1. memory or to minimize the save time. SD-SOUND data can be converted to the “Standard MIDI File” (SMF Fromat 0) format for use on other instruments. etc. Press the OK button. To overwrite a song number that already has data. you can convert the 2. Use the buttons below the display to specify the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO). • The display looks similar to the following. • The display looks similar to the following. Press the SAVE button. COMPOSER data. 3. press patterns of the automatic accompaniment. data. • If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT func- tion of the SEQUENCER. the NAME button. If you wish to also save this special Technics 1. select from NO/1 • The SAVE operation begins. limits as follows. select only the type of data you wish to save. ton to select all the back up data at once. BANK/ALL. • Maximum number of folders: 99 • If the ALL OFF button is pressed. • The display returns to the SAVE display. (Continued on the next page) 141 QQTG0692 . If you wish to assign a name to the file. Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A. Press the SAVE button. select the song number you wish to save to. 2. • What you can save in the SMF format (FOR- MAT 0) is ordinary performance data. use the buttons below the display to mat.) 3. is not saved.

Press the SAVE button. • The song name to save from is shown below the FROM SONG button. • When there is various data other than perfor- mance data stored at the beginning of a file. 8. please set it to OFF each time the file is subsequently saved. • If you attempt to save data to a file number in which data is currently saved. Select the type of data saving. ON: A one-measure space is added to the beginning of the file. the display changes to the confirmation display. This can be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE SPACE to ON to inserting a before the beginning of the performance. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. ON: The sound and volume settings for each part are saved as data at the beginning of the file. 9. 7. • When the operation has been successfully completed. AT CURSOR LOCATION: The song is saved to where the cursor is currently located (overwrite). Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to select ON or OFF. OFF: No space is added. OFF: This data is not saved. Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the SEQUENCER song number you wish to save. 12_Part VII. a space is added each time a file is saved. Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify SD Card (KN2600) ON or OFF. • When set to ON. • The SAVE operation begins. Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound generator mode (GM/GM2/NX). if you have already saved a file once with the 1 MEASURE SPACE set to ON. 142 QQTG0692 . Therefore. AT A NEW LOCATION: The song is saved as a newly added data with the last song number.fm 142 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) 5. 6. the start of playback may be delayed.

8. press the –10 button to 2. Repeat the steps 5 and 6. • The display looks similar to the following. On the SD MENU display. jump down a group. into the SD slot. Press the FAVORITE SETTING button. 10. FAVORITE SONGS SD Card (KN2600) 1. 143 QQTG0692 . When you have finished making the settings. select FAVORITE the location to put the song. 9.12_Part VII. 5. • Press the +10 button to jump up to the next group of 10 selections. Press the SD button to turn it on. 䡲 Recalling the FAVORITE SONGS display 4. 2. 7. SONGS. Select the song. making it easy to load your favorite song to play back immediately. Press the BANK NAMING button to name the BANK. Select the song. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the BANK 1. Insert the SD card which contains the songs 6. • The TECHNICS files and SD-SOUND songs are selected differently. • The load operation begins. press the OK button.fm 143 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Create an album of your favorite songs The FAVORITE SONGS display allows you to create an album of your favorite songs which are aligned in a desired order. Select the BANK. SONGS. 3. and select 3. • The display looks similar to the following. On the SD MENU display. select FAVORITE to use. Press and hold the SET button.

card format. • You can press the SD-SOUND/TECH button to change to the display for setting relevant file Convert SD-SOUND data to generic SMF types. • If you press the FORMAT button. 144 QQTG0692 . Select a function and follow the procedure to execute it. SONG RENAME: Change the name of a SONG. data for use on an external instrument. select SD TOOLS. • SMF files in the “IMEXPORT” directory are imported as SD-SOUND data. the display • SONGs in a specified PLAYLIST except for changes to the format display for SD CARD. file copy. SONG DELETE: Delete a song. 䡲 SD-SOUND TOOLS SONG DELETE: 2. SD-SOUND IMPORT: SONG/FOLDER RENAME: Change the name of a SONG or FOLDER. Press the SD button to turn it on. and file rename are available from the SD TOOLS menu. Insert the SD card to manage into the SD slot. Specify the FOLDER first and then the SONG to copy to. 3. such as file delete. “read only” files will not be dele- 䡲 TECH TOOLS ted. and they are used to create a new PLAYLIST.fm 144 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) SD card management Various SD card management procedures. When selecting a PLAYLIST other than the DEFAULT PLAYLIST. • Specify the SMF files you wish to import using the SEL buttons.) • Pressing ALL DELETE will delete all files. COPY: Copy songs on the SD card. the specified SONG will be deleted from all the PLAYLISTs. however. SD-SOUND EXPORT: 4. On the SD MENU display. 12_Part VII. A “∗” mark is shown on the selected files. Convert SMF data on the SD card to SD- SOUND data for use on this instrument. DEFAULT PLAYLIST are exported to the (The current contents of the SD card are “IMEXPORT” directory at one time. erased when the card is formatted. • The display looks similar to the following. SD TOOLS SD Card (KN2600) 1.

3.12_Part VII. • Specify the top priority of the type of LOAD displays. 2. when LOAD is selected on the SD MENU display (FOLDER LIST/LOAD BY NUMBER/ALPHABET SORT/SD-SOUND LOAD). select SD PREF- ERENCES. • The display looks similar to the following. On the SD MENU display.fm 145 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分 Part VII SD Card (KN2600) Set the priority of displays Specify the desired priority of displays when the LOAD button is pressed on the control panel. Press the OK button. 145 QQTG0692 . SD PREFERENCES SD Card (KN2600) 1. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to choose the SONG SELECT METHOD.

LEFT. automatic accompaniment part. Summary of the SOUND menu items PART SETTING (page 147) TECHNI-CHORD Set the various sound attributes for each Select the TECHNI-CHORD harmony style. PART 1 to 16 • It is suggested that PART 10 be used for the DRUMS part. menu display. Follow the procedures on the corresponding on. • The display looks similar to the following. 䡲 A word about parts The organization of the sound parts is as follows. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it 4. MASTER TUNING (page 152) SOUND ARRANGER Select the type of tuning for the instrument. off. Normal parts: RIGHT 1.) MIXER (page 150) APC REVERB SETTING (page 154) Use the MIXER display to visually adjust Adjust the degree of REVERB for each the major settings of each part. BASS. it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. such as effects. PROGRAM MENUS • When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. part. 146 QQTG0692 . and tuning. Changes the sound of each automatic KEY SCALING (page 152) accompaniment part. are used when the sound is recalled. (Refer to page 59. Select the desired menu. R. 2. CHORD. DRUMS 1.fm 146 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時35分 Part VIII Sound Outline of the Sound The SOUND mode is used for making fine adjustments to the functions related to sound. 1. 13_Part VIII. RIGHT 2.BASS. such as tone. 5. SOUND LOAD OPTION (page 153) Specify whether the various data accompa- nying a sound. Select SOUND. AUTO PLAY CHORD (automatic accompani- ment) parts: ACCOMP 1–5.) Select the type of scaling (tuning). 2. When you have finished setting the functions. (Refer to page 47. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it Sound • The display looks similar to the following. PERFORMANCE PADS part: PADS 3.

147 QQTG0692 . • The settings and effects of the PAN. 3.13_Part VIII. reo balance (L64–CENTER(CTR)–R63). Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to to adjust. Selecting an attribute • The settings display is comprised of 5 pages. • Even at the same numerical value. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the length of the sustain. the sound is completely to the left. select the part. tuning (−128 to +127). 1. The display indicates the selected position. the sound is at the center. select PART • When you have completed adjustment of an SETTING. ume (0 to 127). On the SOUND MENU display. Use the PAGE buttons to switch pages. • The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch. the stereo balance may differ slightly depending on the sound. R63 completely to the right. At CENTER. use the buttons along the bottom of the display to select the next attribute you wish 2. at the ∧ button to raise the pitch.fm 147 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound Part Setting Set the various sound attributes for each part. 4. TUNING: PAN: Use the TUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the fine Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the ste. set the value to +12 (or −12). SUSTAIN: Use the SUSTAIN ON/OFF buttons to enable or disable the SUSTAIN function. Sound <PAGE 1> SOUND: KEY SHIFT: Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the sound. and • At L64. VOLUME: • The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch. may differ depending on the sound. the ∧ button to raise the pitch. amount of key shift (−24 to +24). attribute. EFFECT etc. used to select a sound. and Use the VOL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol. When you have completed adjusting all of the settings for one part. • The buttons on the control panel may also be • A value of 1 means a shift of one semi-tone. To raise (or lower) the pitch one octave. select another part and repeat the adjustment procedure as desired. Use the buttons below the display to adjust each attribute (explained in detail following).

EFFECT ON/OFF buttons to set MULTI: the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.fm 148 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound <PAGE 2> REVERB: CHORUS: Use the REVERB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the Use the CHORUS ON/OFF button to set the depth of the REVERB (0 to 127). GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to is necessary to set EXPRESS. Use the MULTI ON/OFF button to set the MULTI EFFECT to on or off. refer to page 152. refer to page 172. 148 QQTG0692 . CHORUS to on or off. <PAGE 3> EQ LOW: PART EXP PEDAL: Use the EQ LOW FC. PART EXPRESSION on the FOOT CON- TROLLERS display. able the tuning for each sound. ORIGINAL TUNING: able the glide effect. PEDAL to adjust the sound quality in the upper range. • For details about ORIGINAL TUNING. DIGITAL EFFECT: Use the DIG. it Use the EQ HIGH FC. 13_Part VIII. if it has been assigned to the Foot Switch (sold separately). Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127). • For Foot Switch settings. (Refer to page 173. SUSTAIN PEDAL: Use the SUST ON/OFF buttons to enable or dis- able the sustain effect. disable part expression by the expression pedal (sold separately). Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to Sound adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127). GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to Use the EXP PDL ON/OFF buttons to enable or adjust the sound quality in the lower range.) GLIDE PEDAL: Use the GLIDE ON/OFF buttons to enable or dis. if it has been assigned to Use the ORIG ON/OFF button to enable or dis- the Foot Switch (sold separately). EQ HIGH: • To enable the ON/OFF setting for each part.

• Use the MSB ∧ and ∨ buttons (half-tone incre- PORTAMENTO: ments) and the LSB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons to the setting. 149 QQTG0692 . <PAGE 5> MONO/POLY MODE: MODULATION SENSITIVITY: Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to select Use the MOD SENS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the output mode.fm 149 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound <PAGE 4> FILTER RESONANCE: VIBRATO RATE: Use the RESO ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the Use the RATE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the amount of resonance (0 to 127). Increments mento time. the greater the POLY MODE. are in semi-tones. (Por- tamento is a continuous gliding movement from BEND RANGE: one tone to another. interval from when the keys are played until the vibrato starts (0 to 127). BRIGHTNESS: Use the BRI ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the bright- ness of the sound (0 to 127).) Use the BEND RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the porta. change in pitch when the PITCH BEND wheel is operated. release time (0 to 127). ify the PITCH BEND range (0 to 12). enable or disable the portamento function. Sound DECAY TIME: VIBRATO DELAY: Use the DEC ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the Use the DEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time decay time (0 to 127). the sensitivity of the MODULATION. vibrato depth (0 to 127). ATTACK TIME: VIBRATO DEPTH: Use the ATT ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the Use the DEP ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the attack time (0 to 127). • PORTAMENTO does not function for the • The higher the number.13_Part VIII. RELEASE TIME: Use the REL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the • The center value is 64 (±0). vibrato speed (0 to 127).

150 QQTG0692 . press both the corresponding RUS for the corresponding part (0 to 127). MULTI: • The MIXER display consists of 5 pages. Select EQUALIZER HI FC. general changes to the settings. Use this display to make broad. On the SOUND MENU display.fm 150 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound Mixer Use the MIXER display to visually adjust the major settings of each part. the display to set the DIGITAL EFFECT to ON or OFF for the corresponding part. DIGITAL EFFECT: • The buttons in the SOUND GROUP can also Select DIGITAL EFF. Select MULTI DEPTH. change. Adjust each parameter. Use the buttons below the CHORUS DEPTH: display to adjust the volume of the corre. pressed. Use the buttons below the display to adjust the depth of the MULTI EFFECT for the corresponding part (0 to 127). MULTI DEPTH: 2. Use the buttons below the dis- the PAGE buttons to switch among the pages. Select CHORUS DEPTH. Sound SOUND: Select SOUND. use the display to set the level of the REVERB for the buttons below the display to set the ratio of corresponding part (0 to 127). Select EQUALIZER HI GAIN. balance buttons as the same time. use the buttons REVERB: below the display to set the standard fre- Select REVERB. Select CHORUS. Use the buttons sponding part (0 to 127). Use the buttons below the sponding part (L64–CTR–R63). play to set the MULTI EFFECT to ON or OFF • Each time the OTHER PARTS/TR button is for each part. 13_Part VIII. VOLUME: Select VOLUME. select MIXER. EQUALIZER HIGH: Sound quality correction in the high range. Use the buttons below the display to set the sound for the corresponding part. press either balance button for the part. Use the buttons below the display CHORUS: to adjust the stereo balance of the corre. PAN: Select PAN. To cancel the mute. Use the buttons below the quency. below the display to set the depth of the CHO- • To mute a part. display to set the CHORUS to ON or OFF for each part. the part that is displayed changes. 1. Use the buttons below be used to select the sound. Use Select MULTI.

CONTROL ON or OFF for each part. –24 to +24). <PAGE 1> 151 QQTG0692 . Use the but- Sound display to adjust the shift width of the output tons below the display to set the amount of pitch of each part (in semitone increments. KEY SHIFT: FILTER RESONANCE: Select KEY SHIFT.13_Part VIII. <PAGE 2> MIDI CHANNEL: Select MIDI CHANNEL. the display changes the set- ting display to modify the sounds. BRIGHTNESS: tons below the display to set the MIDI channel Select BRIGHTNESS. Use the buttons below the Select FILTER RESONANCE. Use the buttons below the display to set the release time for 䡲 EDIT MIXER each part (0 to 127). use the buttons below the display to set the ratio of VIBRATO DEPTH: change. If you press the EDIT MIXER button on the PAGE 5/5 display. use the buttons below the display to adjust the vibrato speed below the display to set the standard fre. Use the buttons below the display to adjust the vibrato depth for each part (0 to 127). Use the balance the display to set the sound attack time for buttons below the display to turn LOCAL each part (0 to 127). VIBRATO DELAY: Select VIBRATO DELAY. Use the buttons below the display to specify the time interval from when the keys are played until the vibrato starts for each part (0 to 127). • For some parts. Use the buttons below for each part (CH1–CH16). the items that can be adjusted RELEASE TIME: are limited. Use the balance but. Select VIBRATO DEPTH. ATTACK TIME: LOCAL CONTROL: Select ATTACK TIME. for each part (0 to 127). Use the buttons below Select LOCAL CONTROL. on page 190. Use the buttons below and effects may differ depending on the the display to set the sound decay time for sound. the PAN Select DECAY TIME. Select EQUALIZER LOW GAIN.fm 151 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound EQUALIZER LOW: VIBRATO RATE: Sound quality correction in the low range. DECAY TIME: • Even at the same numerical value. Use the buttons Select EQUALIZER LOW FC. Select VIBRATO RATE. quency. Select RELEASE TIME. such as the automatic accom- paniment parts. each part (0 to 127). the display to set the amount of brightness • Information about MIDI channels can be found applied to each part (0 to 127). resonance applied to each part (0 to 127).

7. 1. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the pitch. • The display looks similar to the following. On the KEY SCALING display. you can adjust the tuning for each key. On the SOUND MENU display. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the SCALING. 2. type of tuning. mum of one half-tone. you can perform in other types of scales. In addition to equal tem- perament tuning. 13_Part VIII. • The display looks similar to the following. and PELOG. • You can use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ but- tons to switch the part. KIRN- BERGER. 6. 5. Press the OCTAVE TUNING TEMPLATE but- ton. ■ Settings for each key. as neces- sary. • The pitch can be raised or lowered by a maxi- • If ALL is selected. This is convenient when the Keyboard is played with other instruments or with a recorded performance. • Use the ALL PARTS INITIAL button to return all parts to the flat tuning. WERCKMEISTER. 152 QQTG0692 . ARABIC 1 to 5. • The OCTAVE TUNING for the specified type and key is automatically set. 1. Sound Key Scaling For each part you can change the tuning of each key within a one-octave range. part to set. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the the TUNING ∧ and ∨ buttons. • Select from FLAT. Use the SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the key to perform in. • The display changes to the following. On the SOUND MENU display. select KEY 4. all the parts are set at once.fm 152 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound Master Tuning This setting is used to fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument. for example Arabic tuning. After selecting a key with the KEY SELECT 䊴 and 䊳 buttons. Press the SET button. SLENDRO. 2. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each part. the pitch can be adjusted using 3. select MASTER TUNING.

Use the ORIGINAL TUNING ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF. Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a part.fm 153 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound 䡲 ORIGINAL tuning Each instrument of each sound has its own origi- nal tuning data. etc. 1. in that the high notes are tuned slightly higher and the low notes slightly lower. On the SOUND MENU display. 2. for example. Use the ∧ and ∨ button to set the filter to ON or OFF. select SOUND LOAD OPTION.. the setup is not the way you want it. but in some cases when switching from one sound to another and these settings are recalled. you can adjust the settings so that specific data is not recalled. Sound Sound Load Option The data for each individual sound is set with the most suitable effect settings. By using the SOUND LOAD OPTION. So. 1. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item. • The display looks similar to the following. the acoustic piano-type sounds dupli- cate those of a real piano. You can specify for each part whether this origi- nal tuning is enabled or not. This setting affects the tuning curve that spans the entire keyboard. 153 QQTG0692 . 2.13_Part VIII.

2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the Sound part. • PRESET IN RHYTHM is an optimal preset value for each rhythm for use with the APC Reverb Setting. select APC REVERB SETTING. 1. 13_Part VIII. you can adjust the REVERB level for each part. the DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the value (PRESET IN RHYTHM. On the SOUND MENU display.fm 154 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分 Part VIII Sound APC Reverb Setting Although an appropriate REVERB is applied for the automatic accompaniment parts depending on the rhythms by default. • The display looks similar to the following. 0 – 127). 154 QQTG0692 .

REVERB: REVERB type and detailed settings (page • The display looks similar to the following.14_Part IX. 155 QQTG0692 . 43) CHORUS: CHORUS type and detailed settings (page 43) MULTI: MULTI EFFECT type and detailed settings Reverb & Effect (page 42) 2. menu items PROGRAM TONE CONTROL (page 156) MENUS Settings for the entire instrument’s final out- put sound quality. Follow the procedures on the corresponding menu display. Use the MIXER display to visually adjust the major settings of each part.fm 155 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時52分 Part IX Reverb & Effect Outline of the Reverb & Effect In the REVERB & EFFECT mode. (page 153) MIXER: 3. When you have finished setting the functions. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it Summary of the REVERB & EFFECT on. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off. Select REVERB & EFFECT. (page 150) 4. 1. Select the desired menu. such as effects. it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. • When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. (page 44) SOUND LOAD OPTION: Specify whether the various data accompa- nying a sound. MIC REVERB & EFFECT: • The display looks similar to the following. you can make detailed settings related to this instrument’s effects. are used when the sound is recalled. 5. Settings for the effects that are applied to MIC.

1. Use the BASS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the low range and the TREBLE ∧ and ∨ buttons for the high range. select TONE CONTROL. 14_Part IX. 2. Lower the setting or the MAIN VOLUME. • Raising the settings excessively may cause distorted sounds. • The display looks similar to the following.fm 156 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時52分 Part IX Reverb & Effect Tone Control Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality. Reverb & Effect 156 QQTG0692 . On the REVERB & EFFECT display.

EFFECT (page 168) 4. MENUS Summary of the SOUND EDIT menu items EASY EDIT (page 158) The most often used edit functions—such as brightness and attack speed—are • The display looks similar to the following. on the SOUND EDIT MENU display press the WRITE button to store your new sound. 157 QQTG0692 . • When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. press the SOLO button to highlight the SOLO indication. PITCH (page 162) Adjust the settings related to the pitch. or you can use EASY EDIT which allows you to change some basic parameters on one page. 1. FILTER (page 163) • The display looks similar to the following. When the sound is just the way you like it. Select a sound to edit. • Press the EDITED (or ORIGINAL) button to switch between the modified sound (EDITED) 2. TONE (page 159) Modify the tones which make up the sound. LFO (page 167) Cyclic modulation settings. CONTROLLER (page 169) Only the currently selected tone sounds when Specify how wheel operation etc. affects a key is played. the sound. Settings related to the various effects dures on the corresponding setting display. Select SOUND EDIT. SOUND EDIT has two methods of use. • To check the sound of a single tone. assembled on one display for easy sound modification. Adjust the amount of frequency cut in spe- cific frequency ranges. You can edit in detail using functions more commonly associated with a synthesizer. 3. Sound Edit AMPLITUDE (page 165) Volume settings. Your new sound can be stored in one of the sound memory locations. Turn on the PROGRAM MENUS button. 5. Select the desired menu and follow the proce.15_Part X.fm 157 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit Outline of the Sound Edit SOUND EDIT enables you to create your own new sound by altering one of the this instrument’s preset sounds. applied to the sound. This allows you to compare the edited sound to the PROGRAM original sound as you are modifying it. it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. and the original sound (ORIGINAL).

• Storing your new sound is explained on page 169. Adjust time of sound fade-out after key is and is later selected in the EASY EDIT mode. use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the sound name. BRILLIANCE: Adjust the brightness of the sound. Adjust attack time.) • To record the DIGITAL DRAWBAR settings. if another EDIT function was first used to set the value to its OCT SHIFT: upper or lower limit. RELEASE: • If a sound is stored in the EASY EDIT mode. however. Use the buttons below the display to specify VIBRATO DELAY: Sound Edit the value of the attribute.fm 158 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit • When DRUM KIT sounds are selected and the SOUND EDIT is activated. Shift the octave range. 15_Part X. press the NOTE SELECT button. first adjust the settings. select Easy Edit items EASY EDIT. released. (To specify the percussion instrument you wish to edit. or alternatively. Press the WRITE button to store your new ATTACK: sound. • The display changes to the following. press the WRITE button and fol- low the procedure on the display. On the SOUND EDIT menu display. but the basic operation is the same. VIBRATO DEPTH: Set vibrato depth. then enter the SOUND EDIT mode. Easy Edit The most commonly used edit functions are consolidated on one display. providing convenient and quick editing operation. 2. is exactly as it was Select type of effect. 1. 3. 158 QQTG0692 . EFF: sound itself. while pressing the key- board key for the corresponding sound. the setting display looks different from that for other sounds. VIBRATO SPEED: Set vibrato speed. Set time delay between key played and • An effect may remain unchanged when EASY vibrato start. The D. EDIT is used to set the value. the displayed value of an attribute may be dif- ferent from the value when it was stored. (Refer to page 168) stored.

3rd tone 4th tone TONE SELECT 1. 6. 2nd. RANDOM. FIL- 2nd tone TER or AMPLITUDE for example. Use the DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust Sound Edit item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a the delay time of the sound. at R63 all the way to select the tone you wish to edit (1st. 7. 4th). About tones A sound may be made up of at most four tones.15_Part X. volume. Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the stereo balance. group. STE- REO R. selection. the longer the delay • Use the ON/OFF buttons to select ON or OFF. On the SOUND EDIT menu. For this reason. • CTR is the center point. 3. 159 QQTG0692 . may differ SOUND from those for other sounds.fm 159 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit Tone Edit Modify the separate tones which comprise the sound. Use the PANNING MODE ∧ and ∨ buttons to • The display looks similar to the following. select mode. • A special process is used to produce real- 1st tone sounding piano type tones. At L64. The normal mode. KEY OFF: Sound is emitted when the key is released 4. • The higher the number. the sound is 2. (NORMAL. before sound output. LEGATO: 5. Use the DETUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons for fine NON LEG: adjustment of the pitch deviation. Select a sound for the tone. Use the TRIGGER ∧ and ∨ buttons to select • Use the GROUP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the a trigger mode. legato. for example). Sound is not emitted when the key is played legato. Use the LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the (like muted strings. and the TONE NAME ∧ and ∨ buttons KEY ON: to select the sound. select TONE. cates that a TONE DYNAMICS change was made to the sound. the balance is fixed (cannot be moved). in which sound is emitted • A “∗” mark in the DYNAMICS column indi- when the key is played. Use the buttons to the left of the display to all the way to the left. STEREO L) • If STEREO R or STEREO L is selected for the MODE. 3rd. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting 9. 10. Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the pitch Sound is emitted only when the key is played of the output sound. 8. some edit procedures for piano sounds. the right.

3rd or 4th). • By entering different values for the H-FADE and HIGH settings. Adjust the relation of tone output to keyboard location. item you wish to copy. volume increase to the peak output volume which corresponds to the note pitch. CHORD: 1. press the TONE COPY button. Use the FROM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting tone to copy from. 5. 2. Use the TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the tone LOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the area of the you wish to copy to. for example). you can define a sloping Sound Edit volume decrease from the peak output which corresponds to the note pitch. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones. 160 QQTG0692 . Use the L-FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons and the 3. you can achieve a cross-fade effect. 15_Part X. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display. The sound is emphasized when chords are • The display looks similar to the following. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a • Use the OPTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the selection. • By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE curves of each different tone. you can define a sloping • Tone copy is executed. On the 1/4 display. lower range of tone output. 1. Use the HIGH ∧ and ∨ buttons and the H- FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the area of the higher range of tone output.fm 160 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit PEDAL: KEY LAYER The sound is produced only while the SUS- TAIN button is on. played (like the cutting sound of a guitar. Use the buttons to the left of the display to select a tone (1st. where the sound gradually changes in relation to pitch. as desired. 3. • By entering different values for the L-FADE 4. 4. 2nd. 2. and LOW settings. 䡲 TONE COPY You can copy the tone of a particular sound to a specified tone in the sound you are editing. Press the OK button.

Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display. • By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE 5. Select the tone waveform. 2nd. 161 QQTG0692 . 1. 3. Use the LEV ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol- curves of each different tone. no more waveforms can be added. or softly the keyboard is played. • The display looks similar to the following. output area for the lower range. 6. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display. you can change ume. • The display looks similar to the following. FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the ff sound output area for the higher range. Use the TONE WAVEFORM ∧ 4. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify 5. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection. 2. sound (tone) is output for each tone depending on the velocity (how hard the keys are played). Use the buttons to the left of the display to select a tone (1st. 7.15_Part X. 3rd or 4th). Use the L-FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons and the LOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the pp sound 4. 3. 8. Use the buttons to the left of the display to • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting select a tone. • Use the GR ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the sound group. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the col- umn for the function you wish to adjust. • When the upper limit of a waveform is set to 127. Sound Edit desired. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones. 1. as desired. 2.fm 161 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit VELOCITY LAYER TONE DYNAMICS Adjust these settings to regulate the tone output You can adjust the settings so that a different relative to the velocity. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to edit the other wave- forms. Repeat steps 2 to 7 for the other tones. Use the FLT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the the way the tone sounds relative to how hard sound. as desired. Use the HIGH ∧ and ∨ buttons and the H- and ∨ buttons to select the waveform. as the velocity range.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones. Use the OCT SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the octave of the sound. Use the DETUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to fine- adjust the pitch. 4. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a • The display looks similar to the following. • Slight differences in the DETUNE values 2. Use the RIGHT SPLIT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set 1. as desired. select a tone. For exam. Use the LEFT SPLIT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the octave of the left part when the keyboard is split. 2. 15_Part X. Adjust the settings for the pitch change enve- ple. Use the STOP PITCH ∧ and ∨ 1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display. is split. from the time the key is played to the time the sound 2. • NORMAL is the normal scale type. 1/32. FIX). 2nd. corresponding values. • The display looks similar to the following. the pitch is the same ated on the display as you input the settings. 3. 4. selection. select a tone (1st. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting 5. 1/64. • Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the maximum level. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting 1. select the octave of the right part when the keyboard PITCH. PITCH ENVELOPE Specify how the pitch changes over time. Use the buttons to the left of the display to between the tones add fullness to the sound. KEY SHIFT & DETUNE 3. 1/8. selection. when 1/2 is selected. • The display looks similar to the following. The envelope is cre- When FIX is selected. 4. • Units are in semitones. Use the TONE SCALE ∧ and ∨ buttons to item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a Sound Edit select the type of scale (NORMAL. KEYBOARD OCTAVE • Use the START PITCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the start point. Use the buttons to the left of the display to dies out. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display. regardless of which key is played. a difference in pitch lope. 3. between one key and the adjacent key • Use the buttons below the display to set the becomes half the normal pitch difference.fm 162 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit Pitch Edit Adjust the settings related to the pitch of the sound. 3rd or 4th). On the SOUND EDIT menu display. buttons to set the stop point. 1/16. 1/2. 162 QQTG0692 . 1/4. Use the KEY SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- ify the output pitch.

change. • At a − setting. LPF24 (low-pass filter 24) A stronger low-pass filter than LPF+EQ. EQUALIZER/FILTER side as well. Normal sounds are sharpened. Use the buttons to left of the display to select a tone. On the SOUND EDIT menu. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a • For this mode. the softer the keys are pressed. FILTER & EQUALIZER Sound Edit 1. Normal sounds are softened. 163 QQTG0692 . LPF(6)+EQ (low-pass filter + equalizer) Signals higher than the cut-off frequency are cut. 2. BPF (band-pass filter) 2. the greater the 1. THRU No filter effect is applied. 3. 3. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display. • Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time change depending on touch. adjust the settings on the selection. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection. DECAY and RELEASE.15_Part X. Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the respective touch settings.fm 163 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit PITCH ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW Specify how the pitch envelope changes in rela. • Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons corresponding to the ENVELOPE KEY FOLLOW attributes to adjust the settings. Use the MODE button to select the filter mode. Use the buttons to the left of the display to Cuts off signals that are not within in the area select a tone. Change the key follow settings for the ATTACK. the harder the keys are pressed. Use the LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch change level depending on touch. At a + setting. tion to note pitch. the greater the change. Use the CENTER ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the center of the bend direc- tion. between the two specified CUTOFF frequen- • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting cies. HPF24 (high-pass filter 24) A stronger high-pass filter than HPF+EQ. Filter Edit Make major changes to the sound by eliminating specific frequency ranges. Signals lower than the cut-off frequency are cut. 4. select FILTER. HPF(6)+EQ (high-pass filter + equalizer) • The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the KEY FOLLOW SLOPE ∧ and ∨ but- tons to adjust the bend slope. TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW FILTER ENVELOPE Adjust how the filter is applied relative to touch Specify how the filter changes over time. Use the RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the resonance value (dB). as desired. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection. Use the CUTOFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the <Equalizer> frequency range which is cut by the filter. 2. • Use the buttons below the display to adjust the quency. the sound by emphasizing the harmonic com- ponents of frequencies close to the cut-off FREQUENCY frequency. Use the buttons to the left of the display to • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting select a tone. the specify the degree of change in the resonance START POINT buttons to set the start point. the sound quality can be modified by the EQUALIZER. 4. 164 QQTG0692 . Use the PAGE buttons view the 3/4 display. RANGE • Resonance is effect which adds character to Select the setting range (HIGH or LOW). from and pitch. Modify how the respective filters are applied relative to note pitch. 5. For LPF(6)+EQ/HPF(6)+EQ filters. Modify how the respective filters are applied relative to key touch. Use the buttons to the left of the display to select a tone. as desired. • The display looks similar to the following. value. 5. 2. specify the amount of change in the cut-off fre. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones. buttons to specify the curve of change. Sound Edit item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting selection. and the STOP POINT buttons to set the stop point. Set the standard frequency. 1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display. Use the KEY FOLLOW RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch range. as desired. • The display looks similar to the following. 15_Part X. 1. Use • You can use the CUTOFF ADJUST buttons to the TOUCH RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the total upper and lower settings. 6. GAIN Set the level increase or decrease from the value set for FREQ (dB). Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each tone. Use the TOUCH CURVE ∧ and ∨ respective settings. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones. 4.fm 164 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit 4. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to modify the respec- • Use the TOUCH CUT OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to tive filter envelopes. 3. the time the key is played to the time the sound dies out.

On the SOUND EDIT menu.15_Part X. 4. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection. 1. relative to touch. 165 QQTG0692 . Use the LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the volume. Modify how the respective filter envelopes change relative to touch. FOLLOW • Use the TOUCH TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to Specify how the filter envelope (curve) changes specify the time change. Use the KEY FOLLOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to modify how the respective filter envelopes change relative to note pitch. type of volume curve depending on touch. At a + setting.fm 165 ページ 2003年2月7日 金曜日 午後3時19分 Part X Sound Edit FILTER ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY 3. the harder the keyboard is played. as desired. Use the buttons to the left of the display to tons to specify the center of the bend slope by select a tone. 2. the greater the change. select AMPLI. and the TOUCH relative to touch or note pitch. • Use the KEY FOLLOW SLOPE ∧ and ∨ but- Sound Edit tons to adjust the bend slope. Use the CURVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the TUDE. 3. the louder the sound. 5. decay and release. Amplitude Edit Adjust the settings related to the volume of the sound. LEVEL 1. 6. Use the CENTER ∧ and ∨ but- 2. the softer the keys are played. 4. Change the respective key follow settings. Use the buttons to the left of the display to select a tone. 7. note name. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones. • At a − value. the louder the sound. Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the amount of volume change in relation to how hard the keyboard is played. Use the KEY FOLLOW RANGE (1–3) ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch range by note name. • Adjust the respective slopes for attack. • The display looks similar to the following. • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display. the greater the change. the harder the keys are played. At a + value. LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the level. the softer the keyboard is played. • The display looks similar to the following. • At a − setting.

1. select the type of sustain. Change the touch settings. Use the buttons to the left of the display to • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting select a tone. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones. Use the buttons to the left of the display to select a tone. 3. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display. the greater the LONG: change. • Use the TOUCH ATTACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to 3. as board range. Extend the release time of the sound. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting selection. 2. • Use the RANGE buttons to specify the key- Sound Edit 4. from Specify how the volume changes relative to the time the key is played to the time the sound touch or note pitch over time. 1. the softer the keys are pressed. buttons to specify the DECAY time change ated on the display as you input the settings. Use the TOUCH DECAY ∧ and ∨ corresponding values. Adjust the settings for the volume envelope. DECAY and RELEASE. depending on touch. HOLD: 4. item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.fm 166 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit ENVELOPE ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW Specify how the volume changes over time. ATTACK. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display. • Use the SUSTAIN PEDAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to • At a − setting. specify the ATTACK time change depending • Use the buttons below the display to set the on touch. the harder the keys are pressed. 2. dies out. desired. At a + setting. 15_Part X. • The display looks similar to the following. 166 QQTG0692 . the greater the change. Change the key follow settings for the Maintain the key-pressed condition. The envelope is cre.

SAW TOOTH: Saw tooth wave PAGE 1/4: PITCH (vibrato effect) RANDOM: Irregular pattern PAGE 2/4: AMPLITUDE (tremolo effect) PAGE 3/4: FILTER (wah-wah effect) DELAY PAGE 4/4: PANNING (auto pan effect) Delay time is the time elapsed from when the keyboard key is pressed until the modulation 3. SINE: Sine wave 2. DEPTH 4. 5. Use the PAGE buttons to select the respective TRIANGLE: Triangle wave SQUARE: Square wave characteristics. Modulation depth • LFO which share the same number on other displays are also changed with this adjust. Use the TONE SETTINGS ∧ and ∨ buttons to LFO. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones. • The display looks similar to the following. • When KEYSYNC is set to ON: if. SPEED • You can press the OVERVIEW button to con- Adjust the modulation speed. WAVE Modulate the waveform.15_Part X. you play a second note. On the SOUND EDIT MENU display. as desired. amplitude. LFO 1. KEYSYNC When playing more than one note. while playing one note.fm 167 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit LFO Edit LFO can be applied to the pitch. Adjust the respective assigned LFO’s. select a tone. the LFO is applied to the second note as well. Use the buttons to the left of the display to begins. specify whether the LFO starts or not each time a key is pressed (ON/OFF). firm the status of each LFO setting. and a − indicates an inverted phase. PHASE Phase • A + indicates normal phase. Degree of modulation change in relation to touch Sound Edit SELECT Select the assigned LFO number (1 to 12) 7. TOUCH ment. • An arrow mark indicates that the LFO is applied. select 6. Use the CONNECTION buttons to specify whether or not the LFO is applied to the tone. adjust the respective parameters. filter and/or pan to produce a cyclic modulation of the sound. 167 QQTG0692 . PHASE Degree of phase change. • Twelve LFO groups can be used.

Use the REVERB ADJUST ∧ and ∨ buttons to Specify whether the DIGITAL EFFECT button specify how the REVERB is applied. the parameters revert to the factory defaults. • The display for the effect type which is best- • The display looks similar to the following. selected. select • The display looks similar to the following. When set to ON.fm 168 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit Effect Edit These are settings related to the various effects applied to your edited sound. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the portamento time. Use the respective DEPTH ∧ 2. the DIGITAL EFFECT button 4. <ON/OFF button> 3. Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons set Select stereo (STEREO) or monaural (MONO) output of the effect. 168 QQTG0692 . turns on or off when the sound is selected. portamento to on or off. On the SOUND EDIT menu display. 1. Use the CHORUS ON/OFF buttons set CHO- RUS to on or off. Sound Edit • When the type is changed. EFFECT 䡲 DIGITAL EFFECT 1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/2 display. Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to turns on automatically when the sound is select the sound output mode. <STEREO/MONO button> 5. Use the buttons along the bottom of the dis- play to select the attribute you wish to adjust. 15_Part X. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the and ∨ buttons to specify how the CHORUS is type of effect. 3. suited for the sound currently being edited is selected. applied. 2. EFFECT.

169 QQTG0692 . 2. CONTROLLER 1. the effect is applied inversely. • Two functions can be assigned to each con- troller. To assign a name to your new sound. Store the new sound The MEMORY button in the SOUND GROUP section accesses memory banks reserved for the sounds Sound Edit you create with the SOUND EDIT. • The display changes to the SOUND NAMING display. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other controllers. affects the sound. You can store up to 40 original sounds then select the sounds just like the other sounds in the SOUND GROUP. such as the wheels. Use the GLIDE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select whether or not the glide effect is active. • The display looks similar to the following. 4. on the SOUND EDIT menu dis. • When set to INV. Procedure 1. • If you do not assign a name to your sound. The glide effect is enabled. Use the buttons to the left of the display to ENABLE: select a controller.. DISABLE: The glide effect is disabled. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a function for the controller. sound from which you started. refer to page 172. 7. select 5. skip to step 5.fm 169 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit Controller Edit Specify how operation of the controllers. as desired. the • The display changes to the MEMORY WRITE name becomes the same as the original display. Use the ON/OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the CONTROLLER. In this case. etc. Use the DEPTH∧ and ∨ buttons to set the depth of the function applied by the controller. 6. controller to on or off for each tone. the SOUND NAMING button. On the SOUND EDIT menu display. play press the WRITE button. • To assigning a function to the foot switch. When you have edited the sound to just the 2.15_Part X. press way you like it. 3.

press the OK button. 2. • The stored sound memories can be saved on a disk/an SD card for recall at a later time. display. 4. 5. and “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display. the ABC. Press the OK button. Use the buttons below the display to assign a Select a new sound name. (Refer to pages 125. You can select your original sound just like the • Set the character input position with the POSI- other sounds in the SOUND GROUP. abc button.fm 170 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分 Part X Sound Edit 3.) Sound Edit 170 QQTG0692 . 6. • Press the CLR button to erase the entire name. Select the desired sound from the list on the • Press the →← button to center the name. • The list of sounds is shown on the display. MEMORY • Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position. • The display returns to the MEMORY WRITE display. In the SOUND GROUP section. When you have finished typing the name. select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons and repeat name assignment. 15_Part X. • The SOUND EDIT mode is turned off. • Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor position. TION buttons. 140. • The new sound is stored. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the MEM- ORY number in which to store the new sound (1–40). 1. press the • Switch from upper to lower case letters with MEMORY button.

PANEL MEMORY MODE Define which panel settings are stored when the PANEL MEMORY is used. FOOT CONTROLLERS (page 172) Assign functions to the separately sold Foot Switch and Foot Controller.) 171 QQTG0692 .16_Part XI. 2. when the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. 5. 4. it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings. INITIAL Return the settings and memories to the factory-preset status. 1.fm 171 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分 Part XI Control Outline of Control functions Various settings related to the operation of this instrument are adjusted with the CONTROL functions. 3. • The display looks similar to the following. (Refer to page 186.) FADE IN/OUT SETTING Settings related to the FADE IN/FADE OUT. When you have finished setting the functions.) Control OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY (page 172) Adjust the amount of keyboard touch response. Select a function. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE on. (Refer to page 66. • While you are adjusting the settings. Select CONTROL. Define which panel settings change by press- ing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC STYLE PROGRAM MENUS ARRANGER is used. (Refer to page 58. (Refer to page 63. etc.) • The display looks similar to the following. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off.

OFF: • The display looks similar to the following. Use the CONTROLLER ▲ and ▼ buttons to selection by 1. changes depending on how hard the keyboard is played). On the CONTROL MENU display. P. Foot Controllers If an optional Foot Switch and/or Expression Pedal (sold separately) is connected. MEM BANK DEC. P. 16_Part XI. Control select a switch name. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the amount of keyboard touch response (0 to 9). MEM INCREMENT: Increment the PANEL MEMORY number 2.fm 172 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分 Part XI Control Overall Touch Sensitivity This instrument features INITIAL TOUCH (the volume. 172 QQTG0692 . for example. SOFT PEDAL: Soft on/off SOSTENUTO PEDAL: Sostenuto on/off P. select OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY. P. On the CONTROL MENU display. • When set to 0. 1.: Change to the previous PANEL MEMORY bank in order. • The display looks similar to the following. MEM BANK INC. select 䡲 FOOT SWITCH FOOT CONTROLLERS. 2. 1. allowing convenient and fast control during your performance. you can assign it one of several functions.: Change to the next PANEL MEMORY bank in order. No function is assigned. MEM DECREMENT: Decrement the PANEL MEMORY number selection by 1. and the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select its function. initial touch sensitivity is turned off.

TECHNI-CHORD: TECHNI-CHORD button on/off DIGITAL EFFECT: DIGITAL EFFECT button on/off MULTI EFFECT: MULTI EFFECT button on/off ROTARY SLOW/FAST: TREMOLO SLOW/FAST of the DIGITAL DRAWBAR MIC REVERB: Control MIC REVERB button on MIC EFFECT: MIC EFFECT button on PUNCH RECORD: Punch in/punch out APC HOLD: Memorize the chord specified for the auto- matic accompaniment.16_Part XI.) page 188. FILL IN 2 button on PART EXPRESSION: INTRO & ENDING 1: The volume changes only for parts for which INTRO & ENDING 1 button on PART EXP PEDAL was turned ON on the PART SETTING display for SOUND. FADE OUT: P.: FADE OUT button on/off Press the switch to increment the PANEL MEMORY number selection by one. MEM INC. FILL IN 1: 䡲 EXPRESS.fm 173 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分 Part XI Control PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8: FADE IN: The specified PANEL MEMORY number is FADE IN button on/off turned on.. refer to down by about one semitone. PEDAL FILL IN 1 button on TOTAL EXPRESSION: The volume for all parts changes when the FILL IN 2: expression pedal is operated.) INTRO & ENDING 2 button on • The initialized settings are as follows: SUSTAIN: FOOT SWITCH SUSTAIN SUSTAIN button on/off EXPRESS. PEDAL TOTAL EXPRESSION GLIDE: Glide on/off (The glide effect “bends” the pitch • For connection of a Foot Switch. release PAD 1 to 6: the switch to return to the previous number. Specified PERFORMANCE PADS on START/STOP: TAP TEMPO: START/STOP button on/off TAP TEMPO button on. 173 QQTG0692 .+DEC. etc. (Refer to INTRO & ENDING 2: page 148.

(KN2400) 3. it indicates • The display looks similar to the following. when the 2. 5. 1. inserted (page 130). 174 QQTG0692 . When you have finished setting the functions. FAVORITES SETTING FAVORITES display settings (page 33) DISPLAY TIME OUT (page 175) Adjust settings related to the screen display. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off. that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. • While you are adjusting the settings. for instance during disk load and when automatic settings are made. 17_Part XII. etc. but the operation is the same as for HELP (page 33). Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it DISK PREFERENCES (KN2400) on. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings. SD PREFERENCES (KN2600) Specify the desired priority of displays when the LOAD button is pressed on the control panel (page 145). 4. LANGUAGE SETTING Customize Select your preferred language for the dis- played messages. • The display is different. MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION (page 176) Specify how MIDI data is handled when data is loaded from a disk. TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. Automatic display when a floppy disk is • The display looks similar to the following. DATA PROTECTION (page 176) Specify when you don’t want the data to change in cases where it normally does.fm 174 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分 Part XII Customize Outline of Customize functions Many of this instrument’s settings can be customized for maximum playing convenience and ease. Select a function. Select CUSTOMIZE.

1 to 10 sec) SOUND/RHYTHM SELECT: Sound/rhythm and PERFORMANCE PADS BANK selection display (DEFAULT. TIME OUT. 175 QQTG0692 .17_Part XII.fm 175 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分 Part XII Customize Display Time Out Numerous message displays and setting displays conveniently guide you through the operation steps of this instrument. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting. select DISPLAY 4. Customize • When set to HOLD. HOLD. 3. the display will not appear. 1 to 10 sec) ARE YOU SURE?: Display requires user action for confirmation (OFF. • Some messages may be displayed even if they are set to OFF. Press the OK button. HOLD. you may wish to shorten or even suspend the display time of the message displays. DEFAULT. however. DEFAULT. the display time returns to the initialized setting. • You can specify 1 to 10 seconds for the dis- play time. HOLD) ERROR MESSAGE: Error notification display (DEFAULT. 1 to 10 sec) ‘COMPLETED’ MESSAGE: Operation successfully completed (OFF. the DISPLAY HOLD auto- matically turns on. HOLD. Once you become familiar with the operation of your instrument. 1. • The display looks similar to the following. DEFAULT. 2. On the CUSTOMIZE display. HOLD. HOLD. SAVE REMINDER: Reminder display (OFF. • When set to DEFAULT. 1 to 10 sec) • When set the OFF. 1 to 10 sec) EASY SETTING: Display time when the setting display was accessed pressing and holding a panel button (DEFAULT. Use the DISPLAY TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the function.

2. Use the ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF. and KEEP (the From Registration file: settings do not change). (initialized settings). 4. NX SOUND mode ON: Specify how the MIDI settings of this instru- From Sequencer Song: ment are affected when NX SOUND is ON. 1. Use the ITEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select an item. song change. • The display looks similar to the following. However. DATA PROTECTION. (initialized settings). On the CUSTOMIZE MENU display. changed when SEQUENCER data is loaded PRESET (MIDI PRESETS). 1. ON: The data is protected and will not be changed. ment are affected when GM2 is on. Press the OK button. can be protected from accidental overwriting. 䡲 Use these settings when: GM2 mode ON: Specify how the MIDI settings of this instru- 2. or the automatic setting functions. select 3. 176 QQTG0692 . select • The MIDI settings are always stored at the MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION. Specify whether MIDI data is also loaded when panel data is loaded (NO/YES). Press the OK button. etc. In the initialized state. Customize 4. the MIDI settings are not loaded even when the SONG is changed. 17_Part XII. 3. SEQUENCER SONG SELECT. and when PANEL WRITE is executed. 䡲 Load MIDI Parameters? PRESET (MIDI PRESETS). • Select from INITIAL. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the set- ting. SONG COPY or TRACK ASSIGN (NO/YES). Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item. and KEEP (the or when the SONG is changed by the settings do not change). start of each recorded SEQUENCER SONG • The display looks similar to the following. 5. changing this setting to YES will cause the stored MIDI settings to also load in these cases.fm 176 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分 Part XII Customize Data Protection Data which you don’t want to change but which is normally overwritten during disk load. OFF: The data is not retained. In the CUSTOMIZE MENU display. Specify whether MIDI data is loaded or • Select from INITIAL. MIDI Setting Load Option Specify how MIDI data is handled when data is loaded from a disk.

use a commercially available MIDI cable.fm 177 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI What is MIDI? MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the international standard for digital communication of elec- tronic musical instrument data. MIDI terminals MIDI (On the rear panel) IN: The terminal by which this instrument receives data from other equipment. OUT IN MIDI • For these connections. OUT: The terminal that transmits data from this instrument to other equipment. This means that any equipment which has a MIDI terminal—such as elec- tronic musical instruments and personal computers—can easily exchange digital data with other MIDI equipment without resorting to complicated conversions or connections.18_Part XIII. Connection examples 䡲 To generate sound from a connected instrument by playing this instrument OUT MIDI cable IN This instrument Another MIDI instrument 䡲 To generate sound from this instrument by operating a connected instrument IN MIDI cable OUT This instrument Another MIDI instrument 䡲 To connect with a MIDI sequencer OUT IN MIDI cable OUT IN This instrument Another MIDI instrument 177 QQTG0692 .

The following kinds of data can be transmitted/received. sustain. Each func- tion is distinguished by its control number. 18_Part XIII.fm 178 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI MIDI channels Many different kinds of performance data are sent using just one MIDI cable. 䡲 CONTROL CHANGE These are volume. NOTE OFF: Specifies that a key is released. the sound on the receiving instrument also changes. 178 QQTG0692 . the channels on the transmission side must match the channels on the receiving side. • MIDI notes are assigned numbers from 0 to 127. In order for the exchange of data to take place. This characteristic also makes it possible to link MIDI multiple sound generators and to control each by matching specific channels. 䡲 NOTE data This is the most basic kind of MIDI data which is exchanged. etc. and data for the GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 mode set- ting. effect. 䡲 EXCLUSIVE data This is data that is specific to this instrument. NOTE NUMBER: Number specifying which key is played. When a different sound is selected on the transmitting instrument. NOTE ON: Specifies that a key is played. 䡲 PROGRAM CHANGE This is sound change data. and is used to specify which keys are played and how hard they are played. data used to enhance performance expression. Note pitches are in semitone increments. with middle C (C3) as 60. VELOCITY: Specifies how hard a key is struck. and the function which can be changed by the control differs depending on the instrument. This is possible because MIDI signals are sent and received through 16 different “basic channels” (numbered 1 to 16). with the higher numbers assigned to the higher pitches.

Mode settings related to the flow of MIDI COMMON SETTING (page 182) signals when this instrument is connected Set the functions which are common to all to a personal computer. 179 QQTG0692 . Select a function. OCTAVE and Establish the optimum settings depending LOCAL CONTROL settings for each part. parts. it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current function. and select the CLOCK COMPUTER CONNECTION (page 185) mode. When you have finished setting the functions. Select MIDI. NX SOUND and GM LEVEL 2 ON setting TIME COMMANDS. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings. 2. self. • While you are adjusting the settings. INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (page 183) Settings which determine how various per- formance data is treated during data trans- mission and reception. when the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit. on how this instrument is connected to CONTROL MESSAGES (page 181) other equipment.18_Part XIII. REALTIME MESSAGES (page 181) MODE SETTING (page 183) Enable or disable the exchange of REAL.fm 179 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI Outline of MIDI functions 1. MIDI 4. • The display looks similar to the following. press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it 3. • The display looks similar to the following. on. 5. Enable or disable the exchange of various • You can save the settings you specify your- CONTROL data. Summary of the MIDI menu items PART SETTING (page 180) MIDI PRESETS (page 184) Set the MIDI CHANNEL.

select PART 4. 3. from this instrument. Use the CHANNEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select 6. the OCTAVE data to NOTE data during transmission. For example. 1 to 16).fm 180 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI Part Setting Follow this procedure to set the functions which can be set for each part: MIDI CHANNELs. the performance from this 2. octave shift value (−3 to 3). however the transmitted and received octave shifts are linked. 5. When set to • The list of parts covers 4 pages. • The initialized settings are as follows: RIGHT 1 1 RIGHT 2 2 LEFT 3 PART 1 OFF PART 2 OFF PART 3 OFF PART 4 4 PART 5 5 PART 6 6 PART 7 7 PART 8 8 PART 9 9 PART 10 10 PART 11 11 PART 12 12 PART 13 13 PART 14 14 PART 15 15 PART 16 16 CONTROL OFF ACCOMP 1 – 5 OFF BASS OFF DRUMS 1 – 2 OFF CHORD OFF 180 QQTG0692 . Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each part as desired. • When set to ON. MIDI • The display looks similar to the following. • A part which has been set to OFF cannot be used to transmit or receive MIDI data. a MIDI CHANNEL for the part (OFF. On the MIDI MENU display. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a instrument is transmitted as MIDI data and part. if the transmit- ted octave shift is set to 1. Use the OFF. Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the SETTING. • Octave shift is set for transmitted data only. also sounds from this instrument. and LOCAL CONTROL (whether or not the sound generator of this instrument is active during transmission). the received octave shift is automatically set to −1. Use the LOCAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or disable this instrument’s sound generator. 18_Part XIII. 1. the performance from this instrument is OTHER PARTS/TR button or PAGE button to transmitted as MIDI data but does not sound view different parts.

Use the buttons on the left side of the display connected equipment is disabled. 4. 4. select REALTIME REALTIME COMMANDS MESSAGES. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change used to control the performance. OFF: This data cannot be transmitted/received. select CONTROL 3. TUNING. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other function if desired. Rhythm and SEQUENCER start/stop.fm 181 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI Control Messages Enable or disable the exchange of various control data. and select the CLOCK mode. MIDI: The clock of the connected equipment is 3. CHORUS. • The BANK SELECT setting is effective only when PRG. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each control as desired. to select a function. CHANGE is set to ON. instrument’s clock is disabled. con- tinue. ify on or off for the control message. The clock of the 2. 1. MULTI and REVERB on/off. (The tempo is displayed as “q = − − −. Use the PAGE buttons to switch Data for the control operation is exchanged. OFF: Data for the control operation is not exchanged. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select • RPN is the general term for KEY SHIFT. Use the ON and OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec- MESSAGES. Realtime Messages Enable or disable the exchange of START/STOP data (REALTIME COMMANDS). • The EFFECT & REVERB setting controls the DIGITAL EFFECT. • The CONTROL MESSAGES display consists ON: MIDI of 3 pages. On the MIDI MENU display. • The display looks similar to the following. and song position pointer data can be transmitted/received. 181 QQTG0692 . PITCH BEND RANGE and MODU- LATION SENSITIVITY. CLOCK INTERNAL: This instrument’s internal clock is used to control the perform-ance.”) • The CLOCK is set to INTERNAL when the power to this instrument is turned on. This the setting. between pages. 1. ON: • The display looks similar to the following. the control message. On the MIDI MENU display. 2.18_Part XIII.

among non-NX SOUND Technics models which are set to this mode. MEM: NX SOUND: Enable or disable the exchange of program Keyboard percussion instrument sounds change numbers for the RIGHT 1 part by correspond to the same key note numbers operation of the PANEL MEMORY buttons. for connected non-NX SOUND Technics models that are set to this type.. 4. ADVANCED and PIANIST modes. for connected NX SOUND Technics models • For this setting. APC CONTROL: OFF: Enable the exchange of data for the on/off sta. Song number data cannot be exchanged. CONTROL CHANGE data for previous models ∗ and then transmitted. Use ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.. program change numbers correspond to the PREVIOUS TECH: bank numbers as follows: Keyboard percussion instrument sounds BANK A = 0 to 7 correspond to the same key note numbers BANK B = 8 to 15 . FADE IN/OUT data are converted to exchanged. 18_Part XIII. fill-in SONG SELECT and ending data. PROGRAM CHANGE MODE OFF: NX SOUND: The above settings are not converted. Use ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item. The program change KN7000/6500/6000 PR604/804/603/703/903/1000 number assigned to a given sound on one model is assigned to the same sound on all models which are set to the same mode. FILL-IN. On the MIDI MENU display. FILL IN. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings as desired. not only note data is exchanged. XG basic sounds are transmitted and received as XG program change numbers. The program MIDI change number assigned to a given sound on one model is assigned to the same sound on all models which are set to the same mode. ON: Song number data can be exchanged. Program change numbers are standardized ∗ “Previous models” include all Technics instrument among NX SOUND Technics models which models except for: are set to this mode. XG is a Of the performance data. tus of the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s BASIC. MAP R: GS basic sounds are transmitted and received as GS program change numbers. select COMMON PREVIOUS TECH: SETTING. the PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8 that are set to this type. DRUMS TYPE PROGRAM CHANGE TO P. MAP Y: 2. PREVIOUS MODEL MODE ON: FADE IN/OUT: INTRO. ENDING: Enable or disable the exchange of intro.fm 182 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時36分 Part XIII MIDI Common Setting Set the functions which are common to all parts. specify whether or trademark of Yamaha Corporation. NOTE ONLY: ∗ GS is a trademark of Roland Corporation. 182 QQTG0692 . 1. ENDING and APC CON- Specify whether or not FADE IN/OUT data is TROL. INTRO. 3. Program change numbers are standardized • The display looks similar to the following.

• All the values are offset from the current value by the fixed amount. 1. The VELOCITY value of received NOTE ON data is treated as is. DIRECT: • The display looks similar to the following. 1. ON: Input data for the ACCOMP. Press the MIDI YES button to execute the function. 183 QQTG0692 . mitted.fm 183 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI Mode Setting Initialize the settings for when the NX SOUND or GM LEVEL 2 mode is ON. OFFSET: The VELOCITY value of received NOTE ON data is offset (−50 to 50). • There are two modes for GM LEVEL 2 • The display looks similar to the following.18_Part XIII. FIX: RIGHT 1 INPUT The VELOCITY value of all received NOTE CONDUCTOR: ON data is set to a fixed value. OFF: Only key note data of the pressed keys AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT is transmitted. OFF: The note data of the played keys is transmitted. • The upper (127) and lower (1) limits can- not be exceeded. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the value. and perform. SETTING. DIRECT: When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received. • Select VELOCITY OFFSET VALUE. On the MIDI MENU display. • Select VELOCITY FIXED VALUE. 2. Use the CONDUCTOR determines which part it is used for. Input/output Setting Make the settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and reception. On the MIDI MENU display. ON: The note data of the transposed notes is • MIDI channels should be assigned to the transmitted. Select the mode. or press the NO button to cancel the function. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item. • The confirmation display appears. TRANSPOSE OUTPUT OFF: Data for the above parts is not received. select MODE 2. BASS. above parts before exchanging data. select VELOCITY INPUT INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING. the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the value. ON: Keyboard notes generated by the ance data for all parts is received on their TECHNI-CHORD function are also trans- respective basic channels. APC and CHORD parts is received. depending on the parts to use. TECHNI-CHORD OUTPUT it is treated as RIGHT 1 data. (1 to 127) When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received.

4. the data of the transposed notes is transmitted. • MIDI channels should be assigned to the above parts before exchanging data. settings. 3. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the con. Notice When an instrument such as an organ or accordion with separate or divided keyboards dedicated to melody and chords is used as the master instrument. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the setting. • When the settings have been successfully • The display looks similar to the following. • Use the buttons below the display to select • You will also have to specify CONDUCTOR WITHOUT APC (the AUTO PLAY CHORD is as the RIGHT 1 INPUT for the INPUT/OUT- not used) or WITH APC (the performance PUT SETTING. Press the OK button. CHORD + mit data. AUTO OCTAVE SHIFT OUTPUT ON: If the octave has been automatically changed. if this instrument’s split point is set to a note below the lowest note of the melody keyboard of the master instrument. and the SLAVE is the instrument LEFT) as the CHANNEL for the chord key- used to receive the data. played note to be produced. Assign the ups with this instrument as the MASTER. AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT ON: The data for the ACCOMP and BASS parts is transmitted. 184 QQTG0692 . 2. ups with this instrument as the SLAVE. and on whether this Keyboard is used as the master or the slave. includes AUTO PLAY CHORD). SETS. NEL for the melody keyboard. tiple parts by this instrument’s CONDUCTOR • The PAGE 1/4 display shows connection set. OFF: The note data of the played keys is transmitted.fm 184 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT ON: Data from the DRUMS part is transmitted. MIDI Presets Establish the optimum settings depending on how this Keyboard is connected to other equipment. select MIDI PRE. depending on the sound. 1. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item as desired. it is possible to produce melody notes on mul- nection setup. “COMPLETED!” appears on the dis- play. CHORD channel (or if you also wish the • The MASTER is the instrument used to trans. On the MIDI MENU display. And • Assign the RIGHT 1 channel as the CHAN- the PAGE 2/4 display shows connection set. OFF: The data for the above parts is not trans- MIDI mitted. OFF: Data from the DRUMS part is not trans- mitted. stored. board. 18_Part XIII.

4.18_Part XIII. 1.) 1. • When connecting to a personal computer. PC as master: The mode which is appropriate for data trans- mission 3. NORMAL: Ordinary mode 2. 2. Turn on the power to this instrument. you can 1. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a mode. The mode when this instrument is used as the PUTER CONNECTION. On the MIDI MENU display. • The display looks similar to the following. Go to PAGE 4/4 of the MIDI PRESETS dis- play. 3. KN as slave: The mode when this instrument is used as a slave instrument. Go to PAGE 3/4 of the MIDI PRESETS dis- store your customized settings in USER. Connect a personal computer to the USB ter- minal on the rear of this instrument. Computer Connection These settings are used to select the mode related to MIDI signal flow when a personal computer is con- nected to the USB terminal of this instrument. KN as master: 4. install the USB driver on the included CD-ROM to the com- puter first.fm 185 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分 Part XIII MIDI 䡲 Storing user settings 䡲 Recalling the USER settings After you change the MIDI settings. • The display looks similar to the following. master keyboard. Use the WITH SPLIT POINT? button to spec- ify whether or not to also store the keyboard split point (YES/NO). Press the OK button. Press the WRITE button. Adjust the various MIDI settings. Turn off the power to this instrument. INTERFACE: The mode when this instrument is used as a connecting device between a PC with only USB terminals and an instrument with only 5. MIDI 2. play. (Refer to the separate manual for more information. select COM. MIDI terminals. 185 QQTG0692 .

you can return the settings and memory to the factory-preset status. Select INITIAL.19_Initialize. • PERFORMANCE includes all the items which Then. 186 QQTG0692 . turn the power on again. “COMPLETED!” is shown on the dis- play and the Keyboard returns to the normal perform-ance mode. Press the OK button. Select CONTROL. • The display changes to the following. Press the NO button if MENUS you wish to cancel the procedure. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it 5. • The USER MIDI and FAVORITES are not ini- tialized by this procedure. Turn off the power to this instrument once. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the desired items with the following procedure: type of initialization. INITIAL 1. on. • This display changes to the following. You can also reset all the PERFORMANCE 4.fm 186 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 Initialize This Keyboard has many settable functions and storable memories. while pressing the three lower left but- are listed below it. BALLROOM & SHOW and LATIN & WORLD) at the same time. 2. However. 3. tons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (JAZZ & SWING. • The display changes to the confirmation dis- play. • Initialization begins. Press the YES button if you wish to exe- PROGRAM cute the initialization. • The display looks similar to the following. When initialization is com- pleted.

19_Initialize. • The backup memory does not function for the stored contents until the power has been on for about 10 minutes. Separately sold options SZ-E2 SZ-P1 Expression Pedal Foot Switch PLUG-IN feature This model is compatible with third-party extension plug-in software for the KN2400/KN2600. • If you wish to retain the settings and stored memory contents for recall at a later time. See plug-in documentation for information about software features and operation.fm 187 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 About the performance data CURRENT PANEL settings PANEL MEMORY SEQUENCER PERFOR- COMPOSER (MEMORY contents) MANCE PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories) SOUND MEMORY EFFECT MEMORY BACKUP MIDI (USER for the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES • The BACK UP data will not be erased even with the passage of time. 187 QQTG0692 . • Data from previous Technics models may be limited to PERFORMANCE data. store the desired data on a disk/SD card.

files in WAV. WMA (Windows Audio Format) (Refer to page 44.fm 188 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 Terminals Back panel terminals MAX MIN MIC R /MONO L OUT IN EXP PEDAL FOOT SW VOLUME MIC LINE OUT PHONES MIDI USB EXP PEDAL This terminal allows connection to a personal The optional SZ-E2 Expression Pedal (sold sep- computer with a USB cable (commercially avail.19_Initialize. (Refer to page 172.) PHONES Headphones can be connected to this instru- ment. arately) can be connected to this terminal to con- able type AB cable). MIDI instrument. MIDI • For monaural output. trol the volume. The total sound of this instrument can be output from this terminal.) Audio Recorder: Application for Recording this instrument’s MIC sounds and for saving recorded digital audio A microphone can be connected to this terminal. connect the plug only in These terminals are for connection to another the R/MONO terminal.) and MP3 formats. you can record this instrument’s audio FOOT SW sound or manage the instrument data with your An optional SZ-P1 Foot Switch (sold separately) PC. • When headphones are plugged into this jack. Song Manager: Application for managing this instrument’s LINE OUT data on your PC by means of a USB cable. 188 QQTG0692 . can be connected to each terminal to control var- • Applications ious functions. the speakers of this instrument are disabled. • Adjust the volume using MIC VOLUME. Used with the applications on the included CD- ROM. (Refer to page 177.

BALLROOM & SHOW and LATIN & WORLD) at the same time.• An ACCOMP part does not sound if its corresponding AUTO PLAY paniment. all programmable set- tings. (Refer to page 186.19_Initialize. Use the balance buttons to set the vol- umes of the relevant parts to appropriate levels. etc. Rhythm • A SEQUENCER PLAY button is on. record the rhythm change in the RHYTHM part. Then. turn off the SEQUENCER PLAY button. (Note that.) • The part is muted. The rhythm does not start. (Refer to page 181.) The sound you hear is different from the sound • This sometimes occurs when you play back you selected. Follow the INITIAL procedure to reset the settings. (Refer to page 29. Sounds and effects • The volumes for the selected parts are set to the mini- mum levels. (Refer to page 180. Use the balance buttons to set the DRUMS volume to an appropriate level. in this case.) • The LOCAL CONTROL for a part performed on the keyboard is set to OFF.) 189 QQTG0692 . Storage is not possible. while pressing the three lower left buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (JAZZ & SWING. nature of the rhythm selected at the start of recording. SEQUENCER or COMPOSER data which was cre- ated on a different model. To change the rhythm in the middle of the song. the volume with the MAIN VOLUME control. malfunction.) The playback measure indication is different from • The number of measures corresponds to the time sig- when the performance was recorded. When you are not playing back the SEQUENCER performance.fm 189 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 Symptoms which appear to be signs of trouble The following changes in performance may occur in the Technics Keyboard but do not indicate trouble. turn off the POWER button once. Set the LOCAL CONTROL to ON. ton is on. or when MIDI data is received from a connected instrument.) No sound is produced for the automatic accom. Adjust pressed. • The remaining memory capacity of the SEQUENCER is 0. Use the respective CHORD produced. balance buttons to set the ACCOMP 1–5 volumes to appropriate levels. (Refer to page 90. Phenomenon Remedy The buttons. turn the POWER button on again. (Refer to page 30. very low. • CLOCK is set to MIDI. keys. functions and memories return to their factory- preset status. (Refer to page 93.) Only percussive instrument sounds are produced • In the SOUND GROUP section. then turn it on again.) No sound is produced when the keys are • The MAIN VOLUME is at the minimum setting. The volume is very low when the keyboard is • The volume setting in the SEQUENCER contents is played. the DRUM KITS but- when the keyboard is played. Follow the SONG CLEAR or TRACK CLEAR pro- SEQUENCER cedure to erase the memory. Set CLOCK to INTERNAL. • Turn off the POWER button once. Select the desired sounds again. • The DRUMS volume is set to the minimum level. If this procedure is not successful. or only the sounds of some parts are volume is set to the minimum level.

Try moving such electrical equipment further away from the instrument. Noise from a radio or TV can be heard. depending on the computer software the received data may be sent back to the instrument just as it is. (Refer to page 107. It or playback. the keyboard memory changes to that of the data ory are erased. 190 QQTG0692 . does not indicate a problem. • The remaining memory capacity of the COMPOSER is 0. either change the software settings to prevent received data from being returned. If you wish to preserve a song which is stored in the keyboard memory.fm 190 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 Phenomenon Remedy Storage is not possible. Setting the time signature is not possible. or set the MIDI LOCAL CONTROL to off. receiving side. for example.) The playback timing of the rhythm pattern is dif. Set the quantize level to a smaller note unit or to OFF when recording. In this case. The cabinet becomes warm during use.• The QUANTIZE function was on when the pattern was ferent from the timing with which it was recorded. • This sometimes occurs when electrical equipment such as a radio or TV is used near the instrument. If you wish to change the time signature. (Refer to page 108. caus- ing undesirable effects. Data cannot be exchanged through MIDI termi. loaded from the disk. This is not an indication of trouble. Disk/SD card When the procedure to load from a disk/SD card • When performing the load operation from a disk/SD is per-formed. recorded and the timing was automatically corrected.card. consult your dealer or service center. • When the USB terminal or both the MIDI IN and OUT terminals are connected to a computer. (Refer to page 180.• Match the channels on the transmitting side and the nals. save it on a disk/SD card before performing the load procedure. Other • The sound may be coming from a nearby broadcast station or amateur radio station. • This instrument has a built-in power source that heats the cabinet to some degree. Because of this the MIDI sound generated from the keys and the sound gener- ated from the returned data are both produced. If the sound is bother- some.) The Disk Drive produces a noise during recording • This occurs when the Disk Drive is reading a disk. the contents of the keyboard mem.) The sound quavers or is distorted. such as the sounds canceling each other out.19_Initialize. • The time signature cannot be changed for a pattern COMPOSER which is currently recorded in the COMPOSER. first follow the pro- cedure to clear the memory.

29 this instrument and cannot be played. 31 Either: Change the time signature of 10 The data is already copy protected. Please try formatting another disk. The file that you are trying to load was The timebase (PPQ resolution) that saved on a previous KN keyboard. tracks. 30 after it has been recorded. It is impossible to change the time sig- 23 nature because it has already been This procedure is not possible with a set in the existing tracks. Contents The data on the disk that you are It is only possible to copy melody 00 using is for a different product. The MIDI file that you have tried to An error has occurred while the disk load exceeds the memory capacity of 05 was saving. chord and incompatible with the destination song control cannot be merged. If you want to proceed.19_Initialize. A rhythm track already exists. 21 Memory full It is only possible to insert MELODY It is necessary to press REC STOP to Tracks. Special tracks such as CHORD It is only possible to merge melody (APC). 26 55 from which you are copying and are Tracks such as rhythm. Please try again! The SEQUENCER memory has been cleared. ity on a melody track. It is not possible to change the time 06 signature of a COMPOSER pattern Please remove the write protection and try again. RHY and CTL exist in the song tracks. Please select one of the user It is only possible to change the veloc- 25 banks. The disk that you are using is write protected. Please select a preset rhythm pattern. because it is in the GM mode. 17 This is not a STANDARD MIDI FILE. Tracks such as RHYTHM. Please select a different sound from 20 44 This might be due to a damaged or any group except Keyboard Percus- faulty disk. Please try again! This song is too long to be saved as a 28 02 There is no disk in the Disk Drive. FORMANCE” option. The time signature of the pattern from An error has occurred while the disk which you are copying is different from was formatting. Contents No. 33 ters for AUTO PUNCH RECORD. A problem has occurred with your It is impossible to edit a Drum Kit. 22 46 complete this procedure. CHORD and CONTROL cannot be inserted. MIDI file. sion. 191 QQTG0692 . It is 24 impossible to assign two tracks to It is not possible to record using preset rhythm. banks. clear the entire COMPOSER pattern. or control 54 banks. control cannot be copied. you must first The disk that you are using is full. The disk that you are the COMPOSER memory that you are 08 using may be faulty. the same time signature This STANDARD MIDI FILE is incom. 07 Please use another disk. the COMPOSER memory The song you are trying to save is or: Copy from a pattern that has 15 empty.fm 191 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 Error messages No. 27 An error has occurred while the disk Tracks such as rhythm. 47 composer pattern or the metronome. compile banks. It is 43 18 you tried to load is not only possible to load using the “PER- 24/48/96/192/288/384 PPQ. 03 The file that you tried to load is empty. 32 Memory full 16 patible with this instrument and cannot Select a Track before setting parame- be loaded. SEQUENCER Data. using. chord and 01 was loading.

192 QQTG0692 . Please turn the power off. and try again. set the switch to the desired setting and turn the power back on. Record on the 68 SEQUENCER and Copy the melody and chord information into a SOLO pad. This Bitmap is in the wrong format for 63 the KN and cannot be loaded. It is not possible to record directly into the SOLO pads. The song that you have tried to load exceeds this instrument’s available 58 memory and cannot be loaded. 67 Select and APC track or CHORD track. The computer connection is not active because the computer port switch is 62 set to MIDI. SOLO pads are special pads which include Chord information. It is not possible to set the start mea- 71 sure to the measures you set to copy. See the Owners Manual for more details.fm 192 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分 No. It is not possible to delete all mea- 69 sures. The selected song memory has been cleared.19_Initialize. It is not possible to insert over 16 mea- 70 sures in a PATTERN. Contents AUTO PUNCH recording has been unsuccessful because SEQUENCER 56 operation was interrupted before the PUNCH OUT measure was reached. It is not possible to use the CHORD FINDER in this mode. Pleases 66 use SOLO pads when the rhythm and accompaniment is playing. There are no APC or CHORD tracks. Please select the Panel Memory that 64 you want to name. Please select 65 CHORD FINDER from HOME page or CHORD STEP RECORD page.

. . . 184 FOOT CONTROLLERS. . . AUTO PLAY CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 EASY REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 BEAT . . . . . . . . . . . 185 K KEY SCALING. . . .20_Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 MAIN VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 MEMORY. . . 183 CLOCK (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 AUTO SETTING . 117 G Backup memory . . . . . . 92 INITIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 DISPLAY TIME OUT . . . . . . . . . . 165 FAVORITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 LOCAL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 MEASURE ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 INTRO & ENDING . . . . . . . . . . 60 193 QQTG0692 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 DEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 HELP . 182 FILL IN. . . . . 152 CONDUCTOR . . . . 45 EXP PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 LINE OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 M DISK (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 LEFT HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 MEASURE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 DIGITAL DRAWBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 GLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 E MIC . . . . . . . . . 42 Expression Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MUSIC STYLIST . 182 MEMORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 MEASURE & TIME SIGNATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 MULTI EFFECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 MEMORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 MIDI . . . . . . . 51 AUTO PLAY CHORD. . . . 55 LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 FINGERED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 FADE IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fm 193 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後2時7分 Index A F ADVANCED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 MIDI PRESETS . . . . . . . . . . . 180 DIGITAL EFFECT . . . . 118 BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 C CHORD FINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 B BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 MODULATION (KN2600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 KEY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 EASY COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 CHORUS . . . . . . . 53 AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT (MIDI) . . . 171 CONTROL MESSAGES (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 BASIC . 41 DIRECT PLAY (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 L COUNT INTRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 COMMON SETTING (MIDI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 LANGUAGE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 BANK VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 MIXER . . . . . . . . . . . 68 FOOT SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 DRUM EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Disk Drive (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . 43 INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 EXIT . . . . . . . . . 33 CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 COMPUTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . 177 EASY EDIT . 30 MASTER TUNING. . . . . . . 98 DISPLAY HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHYTHM GROUP . . . . 188 Foot Switch . . 54 DRUMS TYPE (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 APC CONTROL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . 50 H BEND RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . 188 D LOAD (DISK) . . . . . . . . 149 Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 LOAD (SD) . . . . . 55 I CHORD STEP RECORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 TAP TEMPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ON BASS . . . . . . . . . . . COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 RIGHT 1 INPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SUSTAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 SOUND ARRANGER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 NOTE ONLY (MIDI) . . 131 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Volume balance. . . . . . . . . 64 SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 O SYNCHRO & BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEQUENCER . . . 73 SEQUENCER PLAY . . . . . . . . 50 TONE. . . 54 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 QUANTIZE. . . . 81 SEQUENCER SONG SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 PART SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 TEMPO/PROGRAM . . . 157 SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . 31 TONE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 PITCH BEND . . . . . . . 140 SD CARD (KN2600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY . . . . . 172 TECHNI-CHORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 T OTHER PARTS/TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 STEP RECORD: RHYTHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 N STEP RECORD. . . . . 117 PERFORMANCE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 TRACK CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 194 QQTG0692 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 U PIANIST . 127 SOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 PATTERN COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 R REALTIME COMMANDS (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 SOUND EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 PAN . . . . 45 V PROGRAM CHANGE MODE (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 P TONE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 TRACK MERGE . . . . . . . 54 ONE TOUCH PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 TRANSPOSE . . . . 81 SEQUENCER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 PANEL MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 REALTIME RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 S SAVE (DISK) (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 TRACK ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 SONG SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 STEP RECORD: CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 SPLIT POINT. . . . . . . 37 SOUND EDIT. . . . . . . . . . . 84 SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 PART SETTING (SOUND) . . . . . . . . 49 PUNCH RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 SAVE (SD) (KN2600). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SONG CLEAR . . . . . . 46 PART SETTING (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fm 194 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後2時7分 MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER . . . . . . . 36 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Q QUANTIZE. . . 78 REVERB . . . . . . . 84 VELOCITY CHANGE . . . . 43 RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 NOTE EDIT . . . . . 30 Standard MIDI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20_Index. . . . . . . . . . . . .

RIGHT 2. MALLET & ORCH PERC. BASS. MUTE. TRAD & WALTZ. FADE IN/OUT. STEP COMPOSER RECORD FUNCTIONS: PATTERN COPY. TAP TEMPO. USA FAVORITES 嘷 MAIN VOLUME. ADVANCED 1.) INPUT MODES: EASY RECORD. CONTROLS FILL IN 2. DRUMS 1. BANK VIEW 16 TRACKS RESOLUTION: 1/96 PER BEAT SEQUENCER STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. GUITAR & HARPSI. BRASS. REALTIME RECORD. 13000 NOTES INPUT MODES: EASY COMPOSER. JAZZ & SWING. STEP RECORD FUNCTIONS: RECORD & EDIT.fm 195 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分 Specifications SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600 KEYBOARD 61 KEYS (WITH INITIAL TOUCH) SOUND GENERATOR PCM MAX. START/STOP. PERFORMANCE PADS COMPILE BANKS × 2. PREFERENCES 195 QQTG0692 . 2. SYNTH. DIGITAL EFFECT. SOUND GROUP SAX & WOODWIND. POLYPHONY 64 NOTES 1024 SOUNDS (990 SOUNDS +2 1064 SOUNDS (1030 SOUNDS +2 NUMBER OF SOUNDS ORGAN DRAWBARS + 32 DRUM ORGAN DRAWBARS + 32 DRUM KITS) KITS) SOUNDS PIANO. LEFT TRANSPOSE ±12 NOTES 170 RHYTHMS × 4 VARIATIONS RHYTHMS NUMBER OF RHYTHMS POP. TEMPO/PROGRAM. INTRO & ENDING 1. RHYTHM GROUP DANCE CLUB. DRUM KITS.21_Specifications. SYNCHRO&BREAK. 2 STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. DIGITAL DRAWBAR SOUND EXPLORER 嘷 EFFECT SUSTAIN. PIANIST AUTO PLAY CHORD MEMORY.44MB). BALLROOM & SHOW. USER BANK × 3. CONDUCTOR. SET. REVERB. DISK TOOLS. MODULATION PART SELECT RIGHT 1. BALANCE. BALLAD. ON BASS. SIMPLE BEAT. 2DD (720KB) DISK LOAD. LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER MEMORY: 3 BANKS 3. AUTO SETTING MODE: BASIC. STRINGS & VOCAL. — SONG MEDLEY. MULTI EFFECT. REALTIME RECORD. INTRO & ENDING 2. CHORUS WHEEL PITCH BEND PITCH BEND. FILL IN 1. ORGAN & ACCORDION. NEXT BANK. ROCK. SAVE. COUNT INTRO.5 inch DISK DRIVE for 2HD (1. CONTROL PRESET × 1. SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY. COPY & PASTE. CHORD FINDER. DANCE POP. LATIN & WORLD. MIC VOLUME. DIRECT PLAY. STOP. ACCOMP 1 – 5.40000 NOTES (10 SONG MAX. RANGE EDIT 8 PARTS: BASS. LEFT HOLD MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER 嘷 SOUND ARRANGER 嘷 MUSIC STYLIST 嘷 ONE TOUCH PLAY 嘷 TECHNI-CHORD 嘷 PANEL MEMORY 3 BANKS × 8. SPLIT POINT 20 PRESET BANKS × 6 PADS WITH SOLO.

SD CARD — SD-AUDIO PLAY. DISK PREFERENCES (KN2400)/SD PREFERENCES (KN2600) PART SETTING. INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.7 kg (25. REALTIME MESSAGES. MIDI PRESETS.5 cm × 2 75 W AC120/220/230–240V 50/60 Hz POWER REQUIREMENT AC120V 60 Hz (NORTH AMERICA AND MEXICO) AC220–240V 50/60 Hz (EUROPE. FILTER. MIC OUTPUT 36 W (18 W × 2) 40 W (20 W × 2) SPEAKERS 12 cm × 2. CUSTOMIZE LANGUAGE SETTING. TONE CONTROL INITIAL. USB. CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER. MIXER. ACCESSORIES SONG MANAGER.8 lbs) 11. CONTROL MESSAGES. MIXER. SD TOOLS. SD CARD • Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. SOUND TECHNI-CHORD. EXP PEDAL. FOOT SW. TONE. MASTER TUNING. KEY SCALING.1 lbs) AC CORD. EXIT. OUT). SD SONG MEDLEY. MULTI. 6.4 kg (25.fm 196 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時38分 SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600 LOAD. USB DRIVER) SONG MANAGER. DATA PROTECTION. MUSIC STAND. SD-SOUND PLAY. USB DRIVER). 1 USER DRUM KIT MIC REVERB & EFFECT. AC CORD. SOUND LOAD OPTION. TERMINALS MIDI (IN. 196 QQTG0692 . DISPLAY HOLD HELP 嘷 DEMO 嘷 PHONES. FOOT CONTROLLERS CONTROL PANEL MEMORY MODE. DISPLAY TIME OUT. SAVE. CONTRAST. SOUND EDIT CONTROLLER MEMORY: 40. FAVORITE SONGS. APC REVERB SETTING.21_Specifications. OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY. • The SD logo is a trademark. MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION.4 cm (41-5/8" × 6-3/8" × 15-29/32") NET WEIGHT 11. MODE SETTING. PITCH. FADE IN/OUT SETTING FAVORITE SETTING. SOUND ARRANGER EASY EDIT. MUSIC STAND. L).2 cm × 40. COMPUTER CONNECTION LCD DISPLAY PAGE. AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND) DIMENSIONS (W × H × D) 105. SD PREFERENCES PART SETTING. LFO. LINE OUT (R/MONO. EFFECT. AMPLITUDE. REVERB. REVERB & EFFECT CHORUS. CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER. SOUND LOAD OPTION. MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE. MIDI COMMON SETTING.7 cm × 16.

failures which result from accidents. Sound Modules. but are for illustration only. PANA(7262) or visit the website (http://www. original purchase (“warranty period”). OR CLAIMS OF ANY PARTY DEALING WITH Card Adapters (in exchange for defective One (1) Year Not Applicable Carry-In or Mail-In BUYER FOR SUCH DAMAGES. Tone Cabinets. misuse. It is possible Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Sales Company (collectively referred to as “the that certain in-home repairs will not be completed in-home. During the “Parts” warranty period. This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period. Customer Services Directory 197 QQTG0692 . mishandling.com). One Panasonic Way. Synthesizers. but will require that the product. DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT.S. you may contact sold “as is”. or Organs. abuse. Digital Ensemble Series. PROFITS OR Personal Music PA Systems REVENUE. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction. COST OF USB Reader/Writer. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL One (1) Year One (1) Year Carry-In or Mail-In MIDI Orchestra. or damage that is attributable to acts of God. The decision to repair or replace will be Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions made by the warrantor. rental use of the product. Panasonic authorized servicer and does not include removal or re-installation of an installed product. and DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage.. be removed for shop diagnosis and/or repair and then returned. neglect. this excludes damages for lost time. complete and easy access to the product by the If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship. Three (3) Years One (1) Year In-Home or Carry-In faulty installation. LOSS OF USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT.A. Panasonic Keyboards. Foot Controllers. Carolina. Drum Percussion Units. OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH Foot Pedals. travel to and from the servicer. alteration.) SD Memory Cards (in exchange for ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES. for the length of the period indicated on the chart below. Expansion Boards. The items listed are not exclusive. 65 de Infanteria. if applicable. Personal Computer SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT. INC. (As examples. loss of media. at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished parts. data or other memory content. DOWNTIME COSTS. service by anyone other Keyboards One (1) Year One (1) Year In-Home or Carry-In than a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original purchase date is required for warranty your dealer or Servicenter. INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF Ninety (90) Days Not Applicable Carry-In or Mail-In defective item) MERCHANTABILITY. Km. set-up adjustments. they are not warranted. Secaucus. or failures which are caused by products not supplied by the warrantor. as applicable. cost of having item) someone remove or re-install an installed unit if applicable. service. or (b) replace it with a new or a refurbished product. requires clear. 9. modification.21_Specifications. New Jersey 07094 Ave. The warranty ALSO DOES NOT COVER damages Product Parts Labor Service which occurred in shipment. Carry-In. improper maintenance. LOSS OF GOODWILL.) PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANY. Digital Pianos. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED WARRANTY Disk Drives. Keyboard Amplifiers. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not to state. WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. or parts of warrantor”) will. INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION. Mail-In or In-Home Service PARTS AND SERVICE (INCLUDING COST OF AN IN-HOME SERVICE CALL IF APPLICABLE) For Carry-In. misadjustment of consumer controls. Puerto Rico 00985 / Musical Instrument Products Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Coverage In-Home service. lightning damage. Panasonic Digital Pianos power line surge. For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Sales Company (787)-750-4300 or fax (787)-768-2910. then write to the service. You must carry-in or mail-in your product or arrange for in-home limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts. OF THIS WARRANTY. PANASONIC SALES COMPANY. which starts with the date of the product. COVERAGE”. ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY. during the warranty period.5 San Gabriel Industrial Park. DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA OF PUERTO RICO.fm 197 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後6時33分 (For U. so the exclusions may not apply to you. warrantor's Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the warrantor. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United States or This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have others rights which vary from state Puerto Rico. or there will be no charge for parts.panasonic. Mail-In or In-Home Service (as applicable) in the United States call 1-800-211. If non-rechargeable batteries are included. misapplication.

21_Specifications.fm 198 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分 MEMO 198 QQTG0692 .

21_Specifications.fm 199 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分 MEMO 199 QQTG0692 .

Please keep this manual for future reference..co. operating or adjusting this product. Ltd. QQTG0692 ENGLISH Se0203S0 ENGLISH QQTG0692 .panasonic.jp/global/ instructions completely. KEYBOARD SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600(ENGLISH) SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600 KEYBOARD Operating Instructions SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co. please read these Web Site: http://www. Before connecting.